CONTROLLER

TK

ThyssenKrupp Elevator
Americas Business Unit
 This document is for Internal Use Only.

Every attempt has been made to ensure that this documentation is as accurate and up-to-date
as possible. However, ThyssenKrupp Elevator assumes no liability for consequences, directly
or indirectly, resulting from any error or omission. The material contained herein is subject to
revision, and ThyssenKrupp Elevator makes every effort to inform its product users of these
revisions as they occur. Please report any problems with this manual to the Technical
Publications Department.

ThyssenKrupp Elevator • P. O. Box 2177 • Memphis, Tennessee 38101

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator. All rights reserved.

Published May, 2010
First Edition
Printed in the United States of America

Manual Number: 55510 v.1.1

 Technical Publications Department
Proprietary Property Information

By receipt of this manual (ordered through TEnet), you hereby attest that you are an
employee of ThyssenKrupp Elevator or one of its authorized affiliates. Upon termination of
employment for any reason, all printouts of this or any manual will be surrendered to your
supervisor, and any computer on which the manual has been downloaded will be presented
to your supervisor for removal of the manual.

This manual has been designed to provide knowledge you may apply to the service and
maintenance of the product identified. The text and graphics contained herein are to be
used for reference only and are not to be used in place of job prints or manuals. When
working on a job, always use the correct prints and manuals specified for that equipment.

All reasonable attempts have been made to ensure that the manuals are accurate and up-
to-date. However, ThyssenKrupp Elevator assumes no liability for consequences, directly or
indirectly, resulting from any error or omission.

Updates to this manual

• When this material is revised, the Technical Publications Department will make every
effort to send updated information to the recipient of this manual.

• If any mailing information changes, please update your records at: TEnet> Technical
Information > Technical Publications> Publication Ordering

TK

ThyssenKrupp Elevator
Americas Business Unit
 This page
intentionally
left blank.
TAC32 Controller Installation

TAC32 Controller
Installation Procedures

Warning

The following procedures are intended for the use

of qualified and authorized personnel only. In the
interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do NOT attempt any procedure that you are
not qualified and authorized to perform.
The procedures in this manual must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules of the
latest edition of the National Electrical Code; the latest edition of ASME A17.1; and any governing
local codes.

All drawings and information herein are the proprietary property of ThyssenKrupp Elevator and are
loaned subject to return on demand and must not be made public or copied, nor used, directly or
indirectly, in any manner detrimental to the interest of ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

Every attempt has been made to ensure that this manual is as accurate and up-to-date as possible.
However, ThyssenKrupp Elevator assumes no liability for consequences resulting from any error or
omission. Please report any problems with this manual to the Technical Publications Department.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-1 Printed in USA May, 2010

Installation TAC32 Controller

Introduction

The pages of the TAC32 Controller Installation Procedures are identified as follows:

Introductory Pages: The section number (1), followed by a dash and a sequential capital letter. Example: 1-A.

Technical Information Section: The section number (1) followed by a dash and a sequential page number. Example: 1-1.

Figures and Tables are identified in sequential order, Table 1, Table 2,...etc.

Revision Bars: Each revised page included in this manual will have a vertical line (change bar) to the left of the text that has been
added or changed. The example at the left of this paragraph shows the size and position of the revision change bar.

Each procedure should be read carefully and completely before starting that procedure. Give special attention to all Cautions and
Warnings; see the Safety Precautions section for details. Follow all procedures in the order written.

All test equipment, supplies, and parts should be on hand prior to starting the Installation procedures. These should be
maintained in or near the machine room for future use.

ALL Standard Safety Precautions must be followed on the job site. See the Safety Precautions pertaining to TAC32 equipment.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-2 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Installation

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program
Manual and the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment
safety information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-3 Printed in USA May, 2010

Installation TAC32 Controller

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program Manual and
the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety informa-
tion on installation and service.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-4 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Installation

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Arrival of Equipment Receiving

Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage. Promptly report all visible damage to the
carrier. All shipping damage claims must be filed with the carrier.

Storing

During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator job site, precautions should be taken to protect
the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture, and temperature extremes.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-5 Printed in USA May, 2010

Installation TAC32 Controller

This page
intentionally
left blank.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-6 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Installation

Contents
Page

Prepare for Temporary Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-09

Configure the UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Temporary Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Runbug Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Electronic Starter Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP100 Overloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Overload Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Selector Tape Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Selector Box Mounting and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Formed Rail Selector Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Formed Rail Selector Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
T-Rail Selector Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
T-Rail Selector Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
AMEE G Selector Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
AMEE G Selector Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Typical Hoistway Conduit / Duct Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Pull Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Mid Hatch Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Mid Hatch Box to Wireway Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Front Hall Station Conduit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Front Hall Lantern / Position Indicator Conduit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Front Door Interlock Conduit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Rear Hall Station Conduit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Rear Hall Lantern / Position Indicator Conduit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Rear Door Interlock Conduit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Traveling Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Hall Node Harness Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Hall Device Connections to Hall Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-7 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Prepare for Temporary Operation

TAC32 Installation
Preliminary Installation
Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Installer’s Manual to install the following components:
• Rail brackets and rails
• Pit channels, jack, and buffers
• Car sling and platform
• Power unit / Controller
• Oil line
• Use the proper door operator manual for the job specific door operator.
Do not apply power to the door operator until instructed to do so.

Prepare for Temporary Operation

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Confirm the mainline disconnect fusing.

3. Confirm that connectors 19, 20, and 21 are removed at the IOD board.

4. Measure the AC voltage phase to the phase at the incoming line of the mainline disconnect,
and record the values for each phase.

5. Locate the controller data tag, and compare the AC design voltage with the line voltage values
recorded in the step above. The line voltage(s) should be the same + / - 10%.

Resolve any discrepancies found in the previous steps before continuing. Failure to
do so may result in catastrophic equipment failure.

6. Pipe and install power from the mainline disconnect to the controller.
Note: Conduit for the wires from the mainline disconnect must be installed on the same side of the
controller cabinet as the motor starter.

Mainline
Disconnect
Power to
Controller

Figure 1 - Power from Mainline Disconnect to the Controller

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1-9 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Prepare for Temporary Operation

Configure the UPS When on temporary operation, connect the following:

a. The AC Receptacle cord from the IOD Card Connector 18, pins 1, 2 and 3.
b. The AC Plug from the IOD Card Connector 18, pins 4, 5 and 6.
Notes:
• The UPS should not be in the AC circuit during temporary operation. See Figure 2.
• If battery lowering is not required for the job, no UPS will be provided. Jumper wires will be
installed in the factory from CON18 pin 1 to pin 4, pin 2 to pin 5, and pin 3 to pin 6.

UPS is NOT in
the AC circuit

AC
Receptacle
is connected
to AC Plug

Figure 2 - UPS Unit Connections

7. Use an orange temporary run jumper to connect EPD1 and EPD2 (located in the services
panel, on the top of the controller). See Figure 3.
Notes:
• The EPD1 / EPD2 jumper should only be removed if the job is equipped with a UPS (for
battery lowering), the job has been adjusted, and the UPS is installed in the circuit.

EPD1 / EPD2
Connected
Jumpers

Figure 3 - EPD1 / EPD2 Jumper

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 10 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Temporary Operation

Only connect the official ThyssenKrupp Pendant Station (Runbug), Part Number
9817323 for temporary operation. The pendant station connects directly to the
TAC32 IOD board (bottom left corner) at the connector labeled RUNBUG.

Runbug Set Up • For Electronic Starters - Confirm that there are factory installed orange temporary run
jumpers between MUTS / USS1 and 134 / MCC1. See Figure 4.
• For Across The Line Starters - Confirm that there are factory installed orange temporary
run jumpers between 134 / MCC1 and USS1. See Figure 5.
.
TR4 9:4 ?:? FROM XFMR1 OR UPS
AC2 AC2
AC2
TR3 9:3 ?:? FROM XFMR1 OR UPS
AC1SC AC1
?A
SAFSP SAFCPU
RUN/STOP
?:?
ON/OFF 102
KEYSWITCH BYPASSED
MACHINE-ROOM BYPASSED
EPD's
RUN/STOP
107
TR1 107

ENABLE HOISTWAY BYPASSED

ARRANGE TEMPORARY OPERATION HEADER AND EPD's
121/131 HEADER FOR INTERFERENCE FIT.
ONLY ONE PLUG CAN BE PRESENT AT A TIME. 115
ADD WHEN NOT
115
DOWN UP ON RUN-BUG
CAR BYPASSED
EPD's
9A:2 9A:1 121.
131 121
TR5 9:5 131
131
MOTOR
PROTECTION
134
MCC2 ADD WHEN
ON RUN-BUG
EMS?
FAULT
9:1 MCC2 9 10 MC2
MCC2 - -
- 11
MCC1
RUN INPUT
TR6 9:6 MCC1 4 12
DSS1 - -

2 - POWER - 3
TR2 9:2
SCG2 1 -
UPTOSPEED

REMOTE 5 - - 6

INSPECTION
(RUNBUG)
FAULT
?:? 7 8
P24 - -

MCF
INPUT x1 SOFT START
MCF
CPU

MUTS
ADD WHEN
INPUT x1
MUTS ON RUN-BUG
CPU
USS1
UP SLOW
USS1

USS2
DOWN SLOW
DSS1

DSS2

AC2

AC2
IOD

Figure 4 - Temporary Operation Pendant Station (RUNBUG)

Connection for Electronic Motor Starting

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 11 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Runbug Set Up
(continued)

TR4 9:4 18:2 FROM XFMR1 OR UPS

AC2 AC2
F-AC1SC AC2 EPEN
TR3 9:3 18:3 FROM XFMR1 OR UPS
AC1SC X1
SAFSP SAFCPU
RUN/STOP
ON/OFF
KEYSWITCH 102
MACHINE ROOM BYPASSED
EPD's
RUN/STOP
107
TR1 107
ARRANGE TEMPORARY OPERATION HEADER AND
ENABLE 121/131 HEADER FOR INTERFERENCE FIT. HOISTWAY BYPASSED
ONLY ONE PLUG CAN BE PRESENT AT A TIME. EPD's
115
ADD WHEN NOT 115
DOWN UP ON RUN-BUG
CAR BYPASSED
EPD's
9B:4 9B:3 121.
131 121
TR5 9:5 131
131
MOTOR
PROTECTION
134
MCC2 ADD WHEN
ON RUN-BUG

9:1 MCC2 MC2

MCC2
MCC1
TR6 9:6 MCC1 MC1
DSS1

TR2 9:2
SCG2 MCE MC2AUX MC1AUX
INPUT x1 MCE 13 14 13 14
REMOTE
CPU
INSPECTION
(RUNBUG) MCD
MC2AUX MC1AUX
INPUT x1 MCD 21 22 21 22
CPU
?:?
P24
MCF
INPUT x1 MCF
CPU
ADD WHEN
MUTS ON RUN-BUG
INPUT x1 MUTS
CPU USS1
USS1 UP SLOW

USS2
DSS1 DOWN SLOW

DSS2
TSRCPU
SCG2

AC2

AC2
IOD

Figure 5 - Temporary Operation Pendant Station (RUNBUG)

Connection for Across the Line Motor Starting

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 12 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Runbug Set Up
(continued) 8. Remove the plug at connector 16 on the IOD board. See Figure 6.

Connector 9A
Connector 16
Connector 9

Figure 6 - IOD Board (6300 ACJ1)

9. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

10. Use a volt meter on the AC mode, and confirm the voltage between X1 and X4 of T1 is
120 VAC =/ – 10%.

If the voltage is +/- 10%, do not continue until this issue is resolved.

11. Turn OFF the mainline disconnect.

12. Install the plug at connector 16 on the IOD Board.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 13 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Runbug Set Up
(continued) 13. Remove connector 9A, located at the bottom left corner of the IOD board.
Note: Be sure to save connector 9A as it will be reinstalled after temporary operation.

14. Install the RUNBUG plug at connector 9 of the IOD board. See Figure 7.

RUNBUG
Plug

Figure 7 - RUNBUG at Connector 9 of IOD Board

15. Fill the power unit oil reservoir with the appropriate oil for this job.

16. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

17. Confirm that the AC LED is illuminated. See Figure 8, Detail A.

Detail A

AC

See Detail A

Figure 8 - IOD Board Illuminated LED’s

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 14 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Electronic Starter Set Up

Prior to energizing the power unit motor, verify the electronic starter overload and starting current.

Verify the Overload and Starting Current Adjustment

Note: The starting current is 3 X Nameplate Full Load Amps (FLA).

1. Confirm that the electronic starter is energized and the LCD displays “MOTOR STATUS
STOPPED.” See Figure 9.

2. If the LCD displays any message other than “MOTOR STATUS STOPPED,” consult the trouble-
shooting section of the 72DV Starter manual.

Scroll Up Button

Exit Menu / Save Button Enter Menu Button

Scroll Down Button

Figure 9 - Electronic Starter Menu

Setup the Starting Current Adjustment

1. From the Motor Status Menu, press the LEFT ARROW key. The STATUS menu displays.

2. Press the DOWN key twice to display the PARAMETERS menu.

3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key. STARTING AMPS displays.

• If the value is correct, continue with Step 5.
• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 4.

4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key again to access the value. Press the UP OR DOWN ARROW key to
adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to move to the next digit.

5. Be certain that the values are correct, then press the LEFT ARROW key to save the values and
exit STARTING AMPS.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 15 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Electronic Starter Set Up

(continued)
Setup the Overload Current

Note: The Overload Current should equal the nameplate Full Load AMP's (FLA).

1. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press the LEFT ARROW key. The STATUS menu displays.

2. Press the DOWN ARROW key twice and PARAMETERS displays.

3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key and STARTING AMPS displays.

4. Press the DOWN ARROW key until OVERLOAD AMPS appears in the display.

• If the value is correct, continue with Step 6.

• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 5.
5. Press the RIGHT ARROW key. Press the RIGHT ARROW key again to access the value. Press the
UP OR DOWN ARROW key to adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press the RIGHT ARROW key
to move to the next digit.

6. Be certain that the values are correct, then press the LEFT ARROW key to save the values and
exit OVERLOAD AMPS.

Mechanical Starter Set Up

with ESP100 Overloads
ESP100 overload current settings are preset at the factory. The following initial adjustment can also
be used during temporary operation for jobs that trip overloads. The actual overload current will be
set during final adjustment.

1. See Table 1 or Table 2 on page 17 to determine the overload current setting based on motor
horsepower and voltage or nameplate amps.

2. Set the full load amps adjustment dial to the overload current setting from Step 1. See
Figure 10.

Figure 10 - ESP100 Overload Adjustment

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 16 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Overload Specifications

Motor Motor Nameplate Line or Phase Overload Overload ThyssenKrupp

HP Voltage Amps Wiring Configuration Current Setting Current Range Overload No.
200V/208V 46 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 50.0 30-60 660BB6
7.5
230V 40 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 43.0 30-60 660BB6
200V/208V 58 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 62.0 45-90 660BB7
10
230V 50 Special (See Wiring Diagrams) 54.0 45-90 660BB7

Table 1 - Overload Specifications For Single Phase Motors

Line or Phase Line or Phase

Motor Motor Nameplate Wiring Overload Overload Motor Motor Nameplate Wiring Overload Overload
HP Voltage Amps Configuration Current Setting Current Range HP Voltage Amps Configuration Current Setting Current Range
5 200V/208V 17.5 LINE 25.0 13-27 30 200V/208V 92 LINE 131.6 67-135
220V 15.9 LINE 22.8 13-27 220V 84 LINE 120.1 67-135
230V 15.2 LINE 21.7 13-27 230V 80 LINE 114.4 67-135
380V 9.2 LINE 13.2 9-18 380V 48 LINE 68.6 45-90
415V 8.4 LINE 12.1 9-18 415V 44 LINE 62.9 45-90
460V 7.6 LINE 10.9 9-18 460V 40 LINE 57.2 30-60
575V 6.1 LINE 8.7 5-10 575V 32 LINE 45.8 30-60
7.5 200V/208V 25 LINE 35.8 20-40 40 200V/208V 120 PHASE 99.1 67-135
220V 23 LINE 32.9 20-40 220V 109 PHASE 90.0 45-90
230V 22 LINE 31.5 20-40 230V 104 PHASE 85.9 45-90
380V 13 LINE 18.6 13-27 380V 63 LINE 90.1 67-135
415V 12 LINE 17.2 9-18 415V 57 LINE 81.5 45-90
460V 11 LINE 15.7 9-18 460V 52 LINE 74.4 45-90
575V 9 LINE 12.9 9-18 575V 41 LINE 58.6 30-60
10 200V/208V 32 LINE 45.8 30-60 50 200V/208V 150 PHASE 123.8 67-135
220V 29 LINE 41.5 22-45 220V 136 PHASE 112.3 67-135
230V 28 LINE 40.0 22-45 230V 130 PHASE 107.3 67-135
380V 17 LINE 24.3 13-27 380V 79 LINE 113.0 67-135
415V 15 LINE 21.5 13-27 415V 72 LINE 103.0 67-135
460V 14 LINE 20.0 13-27 460V 65 LINE 93.0 67-135
575V 11 LINE 15.7 9-18 575V 52 LINE 74.4 45-90
15 200V/208V 48 LINE 68.6 45-90 60 200V/208V 177 PHASE 146.0 90-180
220V 44 LINE 62.9 45-90 220V 161 PHASE 132.9 67-135
230V 42 LINE 60.1 45-90 230V 154 PHASE 127.1 67-135
380V 25 LINE 35.8 20-40 380V 93 LINE 133.0 67-135
415V 23 LINE 32.9 20-40 415V 85 LINE 121.6 67-135
460V 21 LINE 30.0 20-40 460V 77 LINE 110.1 67-135
575V 17 LINE 24.3 13-27 575V 62 LINE 88.7 45-90
20 200V/208V 62 LINE 88.7 45-90 75 200V/208V 221 PHASE 180.0 90-180
220V 56 LINE 80.1 45-90 220V 201 PHASE 166.0 90-180
230V 54 LINE 77.2 45-90 230V 192 PHASE 158.0 90-180
380V 33 LINE 47.2 30-60 380V 116 PHASE 95.8 67-135
415V 30 LINE 42.9 22-45 415V 106 PHASE 87.5 45-90
460V 27 LINE 38.6 20-40 460V 96 PHASE 79.3 45-90
575V 22 LINE 31.5 20-40 575V 77 LINE 110.1 67-135
25 200V/208V 78 LINE 111.5 67-135
220V 71 LINE 101.5 67-135
230V 68 LINE 97.2 67-135
380V 41 LINE 58.6 30-60
415V 37 LINE 52.9 30-60
460V 34 LINE 48.6 30-60
575V 27 LINE 38.6 20-40

Table 2 - Overload Specifications For ESP 100 Overload Applications

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 17 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Mechanical Starter
Set Up with ESP100
Overloads
(continued)

Pump Motor Rotation

IMPORTANT! Swapping motor leads to correct motor rotation will result in a motor wiring fault. Motor
rotation is controlled through adjustments in the starter and the line input to the starter.

1. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

2. Momentarily press the UP and SAFE buttons on the temporary run box and observe the
direction of the motor rotation (clockwise rotation is standard for ThyssenKrupp equipment
when viewed from the shaft end). If the motor rotation is correct, continue to Step 6.

3. If the rotation is incorrect, complete the following procedure.

• For Mechanical Starters - Reverse L1 and L2 on the starter.

• For Electronic Starters - Change the line rotation setting in the starter.
a. Press the LEFT ARROW KEY once. The STATUS menu appears.

b. Press the DOWN ARROW KEY two (2) times to display the PARAMETERS menu.

c. Press the RIGHT ARROW KEY once. STARTING AMPS appears.

d. Press the DOWN ARROW KEY until LINE ROTATION displays.

e. Press the RIGHT ARROW KEY to access the value.

• ABC for Standard Dry (AP) units (CW rotation when viewed from the shaft end).
The motor is mounted to the left of the pump.
• CBA for Standard Wet (EP) units (CCW rotation as viewed from the pump end).

f. Press the UP ARROW KEY for CBA, or the DOWN ARROW KEY for ABC.

g. Press the LEFT ARROW KEY to select the value displayed.

h. Press the UP ARROW KEY to accept the value, or the DOWN ARROW KEY to reject the
change.
Note: If the wrong value is accepted, repeat Steps e. through h.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 18 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Temporary Operation

Mechanical Starter
Set Up with ESP100
Overloads
(continued) 4. Verify the correct motor wiring. See Figure 11.

Figure 11 - Pump Motor Wiring Diagram

5. Check the motor rotation direction. If the direction is incorrect or if the motor is making
loud sounds, swap two phase leads at the disconnect.

6. Confirm the motor rotation.

Note: It may take multiple attempts to get the incoming line phase relationship correct.

I2/ I3 Valve The I2/I3 Valve is factory preset, assembled on the power unit, and has been tested and adjusted.
The factory presets (attached inside controller) ensure movement of the car and also reduce final
adjustment time. See the I2/I3 Valve Manual–Preliminary Settings–to check and adjust the low
pressure settings for job operation. Begin with the Final Adjustments Section once the job is
installed and high speed is desired.
Note: The I2/I3 Valve requires a minimum static system pressure of 90 PSI to function properly.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 19 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Tape Mounting

Selector Tape Mounting

See the following installation drawings for the proper selector tape and box:
• Formed Rail Selector Tape on Page 24 / Formed Rail Selector Box on Page 25
• T-Rail Selector Tape on Page 26 / T-Rail Selector Box on Page 27
• AMEE G Selector Tape on Page 28 / AMEE G Selector Box on Page 29

Required materials:
• 1 - Selector tape (net travel + 12’ long)
• 6 - Rail clips and mounting hardware
• Tape mounting brackets and hardware as shown in the selector tape drawings

The Selector Tape is constructed of spring steel. Use EXTREME CAUTION when
cutting the band holding the selector tape onto the spool.

The Selector Tape MUST be handled carefully. If allowed to kink, the entire tape
must be replaced.

Top Tape Support Bracket

1. Install the top tape support bracket (part number 196ANY). See the job layout for the
proper quadrant and position.

2. Attach the selector tape to the top tape support bracket; Use two (2) clamping plates with
3 bolts and hardware to loop the tape over the bracket as shown. See Figure 12.
Note: The loop should be a minimum of 6” at its widest point.

Figure 12 - Top Selector Tape

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 20 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Tape Mounting

Selector Tape
Mounting
(continued) Bottom Tape Mounting Bracket
1. Use the proper selector tape installation drawing, and locate all components for the bottom
tape mounting bracket and switch/spring assembly.
2. Use both shim plates from the shim kit to assemble the switch.
3. Mount the switch to the bottom tape mounting bracket of the proper rail (Omega, T, AMEE G).
4. Assemble the yoke bolt kit. See Figure 13.
5. Use the clevis pin (located in the middle switch arm hole), attach the pin to the switch activating
arm, and install the clevis retaining hairpin.

1/4”

1/4”

Yoke

Clevis with Hairpin

1/4”

Figure 13 - Yolk Bolt Kit Assembly

Figure 14 - Bottom Selector Tape / Spring Bracket Switch Assembly

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 21 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Tape Mounting

Selector Tape
Mounting
(continued) 6. Use the supplied rail clips or hardware to mount the bottom tape mounting bracket and switch
assembly to the rail at a point NO LESS THAN 6” below the selector box when the car is on
compressed buffers.

7. Slide the top guide plate onto the tape followed by the bottom guide plate.
Note: The bottom plate has a third hole (for the threaded rod).

8. Install the tape clamping plates onto the tape:

a. Position the plates so that the plate side with the threaded rod is located on the car side of
the tape. Include the switch activating lever on the outside bolt on the switch side of the
tape.
b. Use only the two outside bolts to install the plates; do not tighten the bolts.

9. Insert the threaded rod of the car side tape clamping plate into the third hole on the bottom
guide plate (car side), and slide one of the 4.5" tension springs onto the threaded rod.

10. Add one washer and the second tension spring. Use a washer, two nuts, and a lock washer to
secure the threaded rod, the clamping plate, and the guide plate.

11. Bolt both top and bottom tape guide plates to the tape mounting bracket.

12. Insert the switch arm yoke into the yoke lever, and secure with a nut.

13. Use a washer to install the center bolt through the yoke lever/clamping plates/tape, and insert
the nut and washer on the back side. Tighten all three clamping plate bolts.

14. Tighten the nut on the spring threaded rod to pull the tape rigid.
Notes:
• To achieve the correct tape tension, the spring's total length must be compressed
1.5“from their relaxed length of 9".
• 2” is allowed to achieve a center-horizontal alignment for the switch arm.

15. Verify the tape switch operation: Adjust the switch and/or clamping plates so that if the tape
breaks, the tape spring tension will pull the switch lever down to operate the switch.

16. Cut off any excess tape a few inches below the bottom mounting bracket.

17. Verify that the centerline of the selector tape is aligned within 1/16” of the centerline of the
guide rails, and also free of kinks throughout the hoistway.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 22 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

1. Adjust the selector mounting bracket so that the selector box is centered side-to-side and verti-
cally, parallel to the tape. Tighten the bracket to the stile. See Figure 15.

Shim
as
Required

Figure 15 - Selector Box Alignment

(AMEE G Selector Box Shown)

2. Move the selector box toward the tape until all the guide halves just touch the tape. Tighten the
selector box to the bracket.

3. Align the selector box with the selector tape so that the tape will go through the guides in a
straight path. The guides must not bend the tape.

4. Align the auxiliary sensor assembly with the selector box alignment pins and the connector on
the main sensor assembly.

5. Be careful not to cross thread the thumbscrews, and turn the thumbscrews into the box about
four (4) turns.

6. Press the auxiliary sensor assembly into place. Tighten the thumbscrews enough to compress
the lockwashers.

7. Verify the following and, if necessary, readjust:

• The selector box is centered on the tape.
• The guides are not deflecting the tape from front to back.
• The guides are not pressing against the sides of the tape.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 23 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

Formed Rail Selector Tape

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 3/4” Z TAPE MOUNTING BRACKET
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/4” Z

TOP SHIM
MOUNTING BRACKET

CLAMPING PLATE

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/2” Z

8.0” MAGNETIC STRIP

SELECTOR TAPE
FORMED RAIL

YOKE BOLT KIT

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
SWITCH SHIM KIT Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/4” Z

GUIDE PLATE, TOP

BOTTOM TAPE
MOUNTING BRACKET

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/2” Z

WELDMENT CLAMPING
TAPE W ITH GUIDE ROD

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
YOKE LEVER Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 3/4” Z

BOTTOM GUIDE PLATE

SELECTOR TAPE SPRING

NOTE: SPRINGS MUST BE COMPRESSED 1.5”
TO ACHIEVE CORRECT TAPE TENSION.

Nut NH, 1/2” Z

Washer FWA, 1/2” Z
Washer LWHR, 1/2” Z

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 24 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

Formed Rail Selector Box

STILE SELECTOR BRACKET

MOUNTS TO SELECTOR

Washer, Screw, CSH

LWPT 5/16” 5/16” x 1”

FORMED RAIL
SELECTOR
Washer,
TAPE
LWHR 5/16”

STILE

BRACKET MOUNTS TO STILE

MOVE BRACKET TO RAIL SIDE
OF STILE FLANGE IF NECESSARY.

Washer,
LWPT 5/16”

Nut, NH
5/16”

SELECTOR HARNESS

TO CAR HEADER

NOTES:
1. MOVE BRACKET TO OTHER SIDE OF SELECTOR
BOX FOR OPPOSITE HAND MOUNTING.
2. ALIGN SELECTOR WITH TAPE WHEN CAR
IS AT TOP OF HOISTWAY. SENSOR BOARD
POSITION IS ADJUSTABLE.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 25 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

T-Rail Selector Tape

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 3/4” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/4” Z TAPE MOUNTING BRACKET

TOP SHIM
MOUNTING BRACKET

CLAMPING PLATE

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/2” Z

8.0” MAGNETIC STRIP

SELECTOR TAPE

T-RAIL

YOKE BOLT KIT

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
SWITCH SHIM KIT
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/4” Z

TOP GUIDE PLATE

BOTTOM TAPE
MOUNTING BRACKET
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/2” Z

WELDMENT CLAMPING
TAPE W/GUIDE ROD

Nut NH, 3/8” Z

Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
YOKE Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 3/4” Z
LEVER

BOTTOM GUIDE PLATE

SELECTOR TAPE SPRING

NOTE: SPRINGS MUST BE COMPRESSED
1.5” TO ACHIEVE CORRECT TAPE TENSION.

Nut NH, 1/2” Z

Washer FWA, 1/2” Z
Washer LWHR, 1/2” Z

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 26 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

T-Rail Selector Box

STILE SELECTOR BRACKETS

MOUNT TO SELECTOR

Washer, Screw, CSH

LWPT 5/16” 5/16” x 1”

SELECTOR T-RAIL
TAPE Washer,
LWHR 5/16”

STILE

BRACKET MOUNTS TO STILE

MOVE BRACKET TO RAIL SIDE
OF STILE FLANGE IF NECESSARY.

Washer,
LWPT 5/16”

Nut, NH
5/16”

SELECTOR HARNESS

TO CAR HEADER NOTES:

1. MOVE BRACKET TO OTHER SIDE OF SELECTOR
BOX FOR OPPOSITE HAND MOUNTING.
2. ALIGN SELECTOR WITH TAPE WHEN CAR
IS AT TOP OF HOISTWAY. SENSOR BOARD
POSITION IS ADJUSTABLE.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 27 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

AMEE G Selector Tape

AMEE-G FORMED RAIL

Washer FWA, 1/2” Z

Washer LWHR, 1/2” Z

TOP TAPE MOUNTING BRACKET

MOUNTS TO RAIL
NOTE: POSSIBLE GRINDING NECESSARY
ON MOUNTING LIP OF BRACKET
TO CLEAR WELD ON AMEE-G RAIL.

TOP SHIM
MOUNTING BRACKET

CLAMPING PLATE
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/2” Z

8.0” MAGNETIC STRIP

SELECTOR TAPE

YOKE BOLT KIT

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
SWITCH SHIM KIT Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/4” Z

TOP GUIDE PLATE

BOTTOM TAPE
MOUNTING BRACKET
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 1/2” Z

WELDMENT CLAMPING
TAPE W/GUIDE ROD
Nut NH, 3/8” Z
Washer FWA, 3/8” Z
Washer LWHR, 3/8” Z
Screw CSH, 3/8” x 1 3/4” Z
YOKE LEVER
ER

BOTTOM GUIDE PLATE

SELECTOR TAPE SPRING

NOTE: SPRINGS MUST BE COMPRESSED 1.500
INCHES TO ACHIEVE CORRECT TAPE TENSION.

Nut NH, 1/2” Z

Washer FWA, 1/2” Z
Washer LWHR, 1/2” Z

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 28 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

AMEE G Selector Box

SELECTOR
TAPE
SELECTOR BRACKET
MOUNTS TO SELECTOR

Screw, CSH
5/16” x 1” Washer,
LWHR 5/16”

GUIDE SHOE CHANNEL

Washer,
LWPT 5/16”

Washer,
LWPT 5/16”

Nut, NH
5/16”

BRACKET MOUNTS TO
GUIDE SHOE CHANNEL
SELECTOR HARNESS TO CAR HEADER

NOTES:
1. MOVE BRACKET TO OTHER SIDE OF
SELECTOR BOX FOR OPPOSITE HAND
MOUNTING.
2. ALIGN SELECTOR WITH TAPE WHEN
CAR IS AT TOP OF HOISTWAY. SENSOR
BOARD POSITION IS ADJUSTABLE.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 29 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors

Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors

Install the Entrance Frames and Hoistway Doors.
See the ThyssenKrupp Entrance component manuals for instructions.

Cab
See the ThyssenKrupp Installation manual for instructions.

Door Operator
Mount the door operator(s) and complete the external mechanical
adjustments. See the ThyssenKrupp Door Operator component
manuals and the job wiring diagrams for instructions.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 30 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Installation The wiring/conduit installation details represent a typical two car group (installation for other car
group configurations is similar).
• Flexible metallic tubing (flex) can be used in conduit runs up to 6 feet.
• Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) should be used in conduit runs longer than 6 feet.
• Check job layout to determine the proper quadrant for the location of equipment.
• Anchor bolts and hardware (for fastening conduit to the wall) are not furnished as part of the
wiring package.
• All conduit, wireway, wire, and cable is furnished in bulk and must be cut to length.
• 2.5-inch EMT is run from the controller to the mid hatch box.
• 2.5-inch by 4-inch wireway (duct) is provided for the door interlock wiring and hall node riser.
The hall node riser consists of hall nodes that are mounted within the duct at each floor loca-
tion to provide interconnection and communication to hall devices such as the PIs, hall call,
and hall lanterns for up to two cars.
• Install one 0.75-inch EMT run at each landing with a rear opening.
• Install EMT from the wireway to the 4 x 4 box at the rear wall.
• For rear applications, a rear riser of hall nodes is also required. The rear riser of hall nodes is
mounted in the same duct as the front riser. The rear riser provides the hall device interconnec-
tions for up to two cars with rear openings.
• Strain bolts are supplied for installing down the hoistway wireway (at as many places as may
be necessary) to adequately support the hoistway wiring.

Wiring Diagram Name Page Number

Typical Hoistway Conduit/Duct Layout 1 - 32
Pull Box Installation 1 - 33
Mid Hatch Box Installation 1 - 33
Mid Hatch Box to Wireway Installation 1 - 33
Front Hall Station Conduit Installation 1 - 34
Front Hall Lantern/Position Indicator Conduit Installation 1 - 34
Front Door Interlock Conduit Installation 1 - 34
Rear Hall Station Conduit Installation 1 - 34
Rear Hall Lantern/Position Indicator Conduit Installation 1 - 35
Rear Door Interlock Conduit Installation 1 - 35
Strain Bolt Installation 1 - 35
Hall Node Harness Connections 1 - 36
Hall Device Connections to Hall Nodes (2 Cars) 1 - 37
HN / HNB Boards 1 - 38
Typical Wire/Conduit Pull 1 - 39
Interlock Wiring 1 - 40
Flat Travel Cable Installation 1 - 42

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 31 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Typical Hoistway Conduit/Duct Layout

Car 1 Rear PI or
Combo PI/Lantern

.500 FLEX (typical)

Car 1 Rear Interlock

Car 1 Front PI or
Combo PI/Lantern

4.000 X 4.000
Car 1 Front Interlock Outlet Box

Car 2 Front PI or
Combo PI/Lantern
.750 EMT
2.500 x 4.000 Wireway
Connector (typical)

Front Hall Station

Car 2 Front Interlock
Car 1 Front PI or Combo PI/Lantern
Mid Hatch Box
Car 1 Front Interlock
2.500 EMT to
Controller

NOTE: To
machine
room
Traveling
Cable

Car 2 Front PI or
Combo PI/Lantern
.500 FLEX (typical)

Front Hall Station

Car 2 Front Interlock
Car 1 Pit
Stop Switch
2.500 X 4.000 End Cap

2.500 x 4.000 Wireway Car 2 Pit Stop Switch

Connector (typical)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 32 Printed in USA May, 2010

 Mid Hatch Junction Box Installation
Pull Box Installation
(2.500 EMT from Machine Room to Mid Hatch Box)
TAC32 Controller

0.750 EMT
To Mid Hatch
Mid Hatch
Pull Box Installation

Junction Box
Junction Box To Duct Riser
2.500 EMT (Wireway)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

Mid Hatch Box Installation

2.500 EMT
Connector

Pull Box 2.500 EMT

Strain Relief
Bracket
Mid Hatch Box to Wireway Installation

2.500 EMT to Flat Travel Cable

Machine Room
To Hoistway Hanger Assembly
(See Flat Travel Cable Installation)

1 - 33
Mid Hatch Box to Wireway Installation

0.750 EMT Wireway

Wireway run between
landings 0.750 EMT
0.750 EMT
-OR- -OR-
Mid Wireway
Hatch Mid
Box Hatch Mid
Box Hatch
Box

OR OR
OR

2.500 EMT 2.500 EMT 2.500 EMT

Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

to Machine Room to Machine Room to Machine Room

Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Front Hall Station Conduit Installation

Divider Beam
2.500 X 4.000 Wireway

.500 STR Connector (Flex)

.500 Flex Conduit
.500 Straight Connector

Front Hall Lantern/Position Indicator Conduit Installation

Divider Beam
.500 EMT Conduit with .500
Straight Connector (EMT)
.500 Or .750 Clamp 2.500 X 4.000 Wireway
.500 Combination Coupling

.500 Flex .500 STR Connector (Flex)

.500
Straight Conduit
.750 Clamp .500 Straight
Connector
(FLEX) Connector (Flex)

Front Door Interlock Conduit Installation

.500 Flex Conduit Divider Beam

.500 Straight 2.500 X 4.000 Wireway
Connector (Flex)

FRONT VIEW

.500 Flex Conduit .500 STR Connector (Flex)

.500 Combination Coupling .500 Flex Conduit
.500 Clamp .750 Clamp

.500
.500 EMT Conduit
Straight
with .500 Straight
Connector
Connector
(FLEX)

Rear Hall Station Conduit Installation

.500 Straight Connector (Flex)

.500 Flex Conduit
.500 Straight Connector (Flex)
Divider Beam

4.000 X 4.000 Outlet Box

.750 EMT and Fittings
2.500 X 4.000 Wireway

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 34 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Rear Hall Lantern/Position Indicator Conduit Installation

.500 OR .750 .500 OR .750

Straight .750 Straight Connector
Connector .500 OR .750 Clamp
Clamp .500 OR .750 .500 OR .750
(FLEX) Flex Conduit
.500 OR .750 STR Connector
.500 OR .750 EMT Conduit (FLEX)
Flex Conduit with .500 OR .750 4.000 X 4.000 Outlet Box
Straight
.500 OR .750
Connector (EMT) .750 EMT and Fittings
Combination
Coupling
Divider Beam 2.500 X 4.000 Wireway

Rear Door Interlock Conduit Installation

.500 Straight Connector

.500 FLEX .500 Clamp .750 Clamp
Conduit
.500 EMT Conduit with .500 Flex Conduit
.500 Straight Connector .500 STR Connector (FLEX)
.500 Combination 4.000 X 4.000 Outlet Box
Coupling
.750 EMT and Fittings
Divider Beam
2.500 X 4.000 Wireway

Traveling Cable Installation

Note: All traveling cable wires and hoistway

wires must enter the controller cabinet
on the same side where the CPUA and
IOD boards are located
Strain Bolt Installation
Install strain bolt in the wireway
as shown. Remove one knockout
on each side of the wireway and
install the strain bolt. Secure
hoistway wires to the bolt with
tie wraps.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 35 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Hall Node Harness Connections

HALL NODE CONNECTIONS

Signal
Pin Wire Color
Name
The Hall Node Harness from the controller.
The connectors on this cable must be installed 1 SHLD Shield
in the field. Secure supplied plugs into the 2 CL White/Blue Stripe
“IN” connector on the top landing of the hall
node board. See chart (right) for connection details. 3 CH Blue/White Stripe
IN OUT HC HL-A PI-A

4 TCH Yellow
HL-B PI-B

5 G24 White/Red Stripe

6 P24 Red
RST CON4 CON5 DEBUG
P5
STAT

The Hoistway Cable Hall Node Interconnect plugs

into the “OUT” connector on the hall node board.
XOUT
XIN
1 CON3-B
1 CON3-A

XIN
XOUT
The Hoistway Cable Hall Node Interconnect
Detail 1:
Hall node-to-hall node connection
detail for one or two cars.

Hall Node Connector Pin 1

PIN 1

The Hoistway Cable Hall Node Interconnect The Can Terminating Plug
plugs into the “IN” connector on the hall node board. plugs into Connector 3 of the last hall
node of the riser.
IN OUT HC HL-A PI-A

PIN 1
HL-B PI-B
RST CON4 CON5 DEBUG
P5
STAT

XOUT
XIN

To the next hall node board. If this is the last hall node board, then this
cable is not installed. A CAN termination plug is connected
1 CON3-B
1 CON3-A

to the “OUT” connector, and plugs into the “OUT” connector

XIN
XOUT
on the hall node board.
NOTE: If an extra HN power run is required, then a 12GA twisted
pair (red and white/red) is supplied. This wire comes from the
controller and terminates at Pin 5 and Pin 6.

NOTE: For a twisted shielded pair cable,

cut the foil, braid the material completely
back, and cover with either heat shrink tubing
or electrical tape. Insert the drain wire
into Pin 1 of the connector. To insulate, heat
shrink or electrical tape any exposed part of the
drain wire.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 36 Printed in USA May, 2010

 RJ-12 Cable (typical)
TAC32 Controller

.500 Flex (typical)

HL-B PI-B

IN OUT HC HL-A PI-A

Car 2
Front PI

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

P5
STAT
RST CON4 CON5 DEBUG
XOUT
XIN

1 CON3-B

1 CON3-A
XOUT
XIN

Car 2 Front
Hall Lantern
Hall Device Connections to Hall Nodes

Front Hall
Station

Car 1
Front PI Car 1 Front

1 - 37
Hall Lantern
Car 2
Front PI

HL-B PI-B

IN OUT HC HL-A PI-A

P5
STAT
RST CON4 CON5 DEBUG
XOUT
XIN

Car 2 Front

1 CON3-B

1 CON3-A
Hall Lantern
XOUT
XIN

Car 1 Front Hall Station

Front PI

Car 1 Front
Hall Lantern
I/O signals other than hall calls, hall lanterns, and PI
are installed in supplied plugs. Plugs are installed in
these connectors. If more than 7 additional signals
are required, use I/O expansion boards.
Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

HN / HNB Boards

SPI HN
Loop

HN Board/Black Bracket HNB Board/Yellow Bracket

(used at non-hoistway access landings) (used at hoistway access landings)

Notes:
• Up to eight (8) I/O expansion boards may be used.
• If more than one (1) I/O expansion board is required, connect the “OUT” of the
first expansion board to the “IN” of the next board using the provided cable.
Repeat this process for all I/O expansion board assemblies.
• An S24-1 I/O expansion board will fit in a standard black HN bracket, but will not
fit in a yellow HNB bracket. The S24 will be external to the yellow HNB bracket.
• Harness assemblies are provided for wiring I/O devices to the S24-1 I/O expansion
boards.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 38 Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

VERTICAL DUCT TOP HWA LANDING

2.500 X 4.000
1/2" CONDUIT
INTERLOCK
CONNECTIONS FOR 1 CAR SHOWN 220EJ1
FOR SIMPLICITY, BUT A HALL NODE
RISER CAN PROVIDE THE HALL 1/2" CONDUIT TYPICAL REAR INTERMEDIATE LANDING REAR RISER FRONT RISER

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

DEVICE INTERCONNECTIONS (HALL HALL CALL
462VR001
CALL, HWA STATION, HALL FOR REAR APPLICATIONS,
Typical Wire / Conduit Pull

LANTERNS/PIs) FOR 2 CARS. HNB 1/2" CONDUIT

HWA STATION A SEPARATE REAR RISER OF HALL
NODES IS REQUIRED. THE FRONT VERTICAL DUCT RISER
462VR001 2.500 X 4.000 WIREWAY
HNBs ARE LOCATED AT THE AND REAR HALL NODE RISERS ARE
HOISTWAY ACCESS LANDINGS. MOUNTED IN THE SAME VERTICAL

HN HARNESS
DUCT.

TOP HOISTWAY HARNESS

HN HARNESS

HN HARNESS

1/2" CONDUIT
TOP HOISTWAY HARNESS INTERLOCK
220EJ3
BOTTOM HOISTWAY HARNESS
MID HATCH HN HARNESS 1/2" CONDUIT 3/4" CONDUIT
BOX HALL LANTERN/PI HN HN
SEE NOTE 462VR003
INTERMEDIATE FRONT LANDING
2 RUNS (or more)

HN HARNESS
OF 3/4" CONDUIT 1/2" CONDUIT
HALL CALL
1/2" CONDUIT 462VR003
INTERLOCK
220EJ2

TRAVELING 4X4
CABLE 1/2" CONDUIT JUNCTION
HALL LANTERN/PI BOX

2 1/2" CONDUIT
462VR001
HN HARNESS
HN HARNESS

2 1/2" LB

1 - 39
HN
PULL BOX 1/2" CONDUIT
HALL CALL
462VR001

TOP HOISTWAY HARNESS

BOTTOM HOISTWAY HARNESS
HN HARNESS

INTERMEDIATE INTERLOCKS WIRE

TRAVELING CABLE
SEE NOTE Note:

2 1/2" CONDUIT
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL WIRES THAT MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE RUN FROM THE
BOTTOM HWA LANDING

HN HARNESS
2 RUNS OF 3/4" CONDUIT CONTROLLER TO THE VERTICAL DUCT. REFER TO THE JOB REQUIREMENTS AND
TO NEXT CONTROLLER SECTION 18 MATERIAL TO DETERMINE IF ANY ADDITIONAL WIRING (LISTED BELOW)

BOTTOM HOISTWAY HARNESS

1/2" CONDUIT IS REQUIRED.
CONTROLLER TAC32 INTERLOCK
220EJ1
CROSS-CONNECT CONTROLLER 1. TELESCOPING JACK WIRING - (2) 220BV4 HOISTWAY WIRE ASSEMBLIES
AND 220BV10 1/2" CONDUIT 2. EXTRA HN POWER - 12 GA RED-WH/RED TWISTED PAIR
HALL CALL
HNB 462VR002 3. FLASHING HALL SIGNS - 220BV4 HOISTWAY WIRE ASSEMBLY
*FOR DISCRETE PIs, 220BVx HOISTWAY CABLE AND 3/4" CONDUIT IS PROVIDED.
1/2" CONDUIT
HWA STATION
462VR002

1/2" CONDUIT FIRE SERV

220BV7

1/2" CONDUIT
PIT STOP SW
Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

Interlock Wiring

IN TOP HOISTWAY HARNESS CLOSED END 220EJ1

SPLICE

IOD 5:3 BLACK (AC1B) WH/RED

(AC1B)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

FOR TOP HWA HDI TOP
IOD 5:4 WH/BK (2H5) WH/RED INTERLOCK
(2H5)

GREEN
CONTROLLER GND GREEN

FOR FRONT NON HWA HDI IOD 5:5 WHITE (AC1B)

(AC1B)
INTERMEDIATE
INTERLOCK WIRE
FOR REAR NON HWA HDI IOD 5:7 GRAY (AC1B)
(AC1B)

(FHDI)
NOTE: CLAMP 292NL003 CONNECTOR ONTO
292NL003 INTERMEDIATE INTERLOCK WIRE, THEN PLUG IN
SEE NOTE 220EJ2/3 CABLE.

GREEN
WH/TAN
FRONT

3
INTERMEDIATE
+ INTERLOCK

GR/RED (RHDI)
220EJ3

1
REAR

1 - 40
INTERMEDIATE
+
INTERLOCK

3
220EJ2

3
FRONT
+ INTERMEDIATE

1
INTERLOCK
IOD 5:8 RED (226)
FOR REAR NON HWA HDI
(226)

FOR FRONT NON HWA HDI IOD 5:6 TAN (216)

(216)
GREEN GREEN
CONTROLLER GND

BOTTOM
IOD 5:1 BLACK (AC1B) WH/RED INTERLOCK
(AC1B)
FOR BOTTOM HWA HDI
IOD 5:2 WH/BK (2H2) WH/RED
(2H2)
220EJ1
IN BOTTOM
HOISTWAY HARNESS
Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

 (continued)
TAC32 Controller

Interlock Wiring

220EJ1 USED FOR HORIZONTAL INTERLOCK RUN TO TOP AND BOTTOM LANDING INTERLOCKS
COLOR LABEL

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

WHITE/RED
HN HARNESS HN HARNESS FOR CONTROLLER TO FIRST HN CONNECTION (OR AN HN-HN INTERCONNECTION GREEN/YELLOW
LONGER THAN 24FT) IS RAW CABLE (CONNECTORS INSTALLED BY FIELD) - P/N 462ML1 OR 462PB1.
WHITE/RED
HN HARNESSES FOR HN-HN INTERCONNECTIONS (B ETWEEN 4FT AND 24 FT) ARE SUPPLIED CUT TO
SPECIFIED LENGTH WITH CONNECTORS ON THE ENDS. - P/Ns 462ML2,3,4,5,6,7,8 OR
462PB2,3,4,5,6,7,8. 220EJ2 (12 FEET LONG, FOR FRONT) USED FOR HORIZONTAL INTERLOCK RUN TO INTERMEDIATE
*REFER TO DRAWING 494YR FOR SPECIFICATION OF WHICH HN HARNESS IS REQUIRED FOR EACH HN 220EJ3 (24 FEET LONG, FOR REAR) LANDING INTERLOCKS
INTERCONNECTION (THIS IS A JOB SPECIFIC DRAWING). COLOR LABEL

3
COLOR LABEL
WHITE/RED
WH/RE G24
+ GREEN/YELLOW
RED P24

1
YELLOW TCH WHITE/RED
BLUE
WHITE
SHIELD
TOP HOISTWAY HARNESS
COLOR LABEL

462VR001 (12 FEET LONG) WH/BK 2H5

462VR002 (16 FEET LONG) RJ12 CABLES USED FOR HALL DEVICE CONNECTIONS BLACK AC1B
462VR003 (24 FEET LONG) GND WIRE INCLUDED FOR GROUNDING THE HALL DEVICES.
WH/OR SPT2
COLOR LABEL ORANGE SPT1

462VJ001

1 - 41
WHITE AC1B

462VJ003
FRONT ONLY
GREEN

FRONT & REAR

GRAY AC1B
GREEN

BOTTOM HOISTWAY HARNESS COLOR LABEL

220GG001 FIRE SERVICE CABLE COLOR LABEL WH/BK 2H2

RED HN 4:1 - P24G BLACK AC1B
WH/BL 115
RED HN 4:2 - FS1I
BLUE 108
RED HN 4:3 - FSH1/3 WH/YE SPB2
462VJ002

RED HN 4:4 - FSH2/4 YELLOW SPB1

462VJ004
FRONT ONLY

RED HN 4:5 - FSH5 TAN 216

FRONT AND REAR

RED HN 4:6 - G24 GREEN

RED 226

INTERMEDIATE INTERLOCKS
CONTROLLER CROSS-CONNECT COLOR LABEL
COLOR LABEL WH/TAN FHD1
GREEN
BLUE
900XY008

GRAY/RED RHD1
FRONT ONLY
>2 OPENINGS

WHITE
462VJ005

SHIELD
FRONT AND REAR

BLUE
WHITE
SHIELD

220BVx HOISTWAY CABLES USED FOR VARIOUS OPTIONS.

x=NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS.
Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

PLACE THE TRAVEL CABLE IN

THESUSPENSION DEVICE.
SLIDE THE CLAMPING WEDGE IN,
. AND SECURE IT
WITH A FEW HAMMER TAPS.
THE FLAT TRAVEL CABLE MUST BE SUPPORTED AT:

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

1. THE MIDPOINT OF THE HOISTWAY AND
TO MID HATCH BOX
2. THE CAR BY THE SUPPLIED HANGING DEVICES
(THEN TO CONTROLLER)
Flat Travel Cable Installation

HOISTWAY HANGER CAR HANGER THE CABLE SHOULD BE

TIGHTLY HELD, BUT NOT
CRUSHED OR DEFORMED IN
THE SUSPENSION DEVICE.

HOISTWAY HANGER

TRAVEL CABLE

SUSPENSION DEVICE
CAR
CLAMPING WEDGE

1 - 42
TOP HOISTWAY LAYOUT VIEW

TO CAR
OPERATING
PANEL

IT IS CRITICAL THAT THE

CAR HOISTWAY HANGING DEVICE CAR HANGER
AND THE CAR HANGING
DEVICE ARE ALIGNED ON THE
SAME PLANE. FAILURE TO DO
SO WILL RESULT IN POOR 16" TO 24"
TRACKING.

DO NOT LET THE LOOP TOUCH

THE CAR'S BOTTOM EDGES
OR "BELL OUT"
Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

Suggested Method Note: See the job wiring diagrams.

of Installation
The following wireways / conduits are required:

• Hall station and door interlock riser

• Machine room to junction box
• Hoistway access and final limits (if required)
• Controller cross-connects (group jobs only)

1. Mount the junction box to the guide rail at a point above the center point of car travel and also
above the entrance header. See the job layout for the proper quadrant.

2. Run conduit or wireway from the power unit/controller in the machine room to the junction box.

3. Install the hall station and the door interlock riser.

4. Run conduit for the hall fixtures.

5. Run conduit for final limits as required.

CAN Repeater Definitions

Assembly • Wiring Duct - A duct that has hoistway wiring in it (interlocks, safety circuit, CAN communica-
tions, etc.).
• Risers - Sets of front hall calls and sets of rear hall calls.
• Hoistway CAN Nodes - HN's and CAN position indicators.
• Lobby Panel Nodes - CN's and CAN position indicators.
Typically -
Only one CN is required per group in the lobby panel.
If the CAN position indicator is required, then there will be one CAN position indicator per
car in the lobby panel.
The CN plus the CAN PI's that serve a single group make up a single set of lobby panel
nodes.

Provide a CAN Repeater Box Assembly for each hoistway CAN channel segment leaving the
machine room:
• If there is more than one set of CAN nodes serving the hoistway and/or a lobby panel, and
given that front and rear are considered separate sets, then one repeater is required per set of
hoistway and lobby panel CAN nodes.
• If only one set of hoistway CAN nodes is required, then no repeater is required.
• Do not provide CAN repeaters for a modernization job where no hoistway CAN channel seg-
ments leave the machine room.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 43 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Hoistway and Machine Room Wiring

CAN Repeater
Assembly
(continued) Sets of CAN Nodes

1. HN's and CAN PI's that are linked together to serve front opening functions for 1 or 2 cars or
the group in a wiring duct.

2. HN's and CAN PI's that are linked together to serve rear opening functions for 1 or 2 cars or the
group in a wiring duct.

3. CN and CAN PI's that are linked together to serve group and car functions in a lobby panel.

CAN Repeater Assembly Examples

(Hoistway access is required, and lobby panel with CN is remotely located)

Number Sets of
of Wiring Number CAN Number of
Number of Cars Openings Ducts of Risers Nodes Repeaters

1 Front Only 1 1 1 0

1 Front and Rear 1 2 2 2

1 Front Only 1 1 2 2

1 Front and Rear 1 2 3 3

2 (adjacent) Front Only 1 1 1 0

2 (adjacent) Front and Rear 1 2 2 2

2 (adjacent) Front and Rear 1 2 3 3

2 (not adjacent) Front Only 2 1 2 2

2 (not adjacent) Front Only 2 2 2 2

2 (not adjacent) Front Only 2 2 3 3

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 44 Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

EMERGENCY EXIT SWITCH

Car Top Wiring

(FIELD WIRED)

NOTES:
1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT
1. PHOTO EYE AND SAFETY EDGE CABLES WIRE TO CONNECTOR AT EMERGENCY EXIT
TERMINAL STRIP INSIDE DOOR OPERATOR. SWITCH TO 90 DEG. CONNECTOR
AT 4 x 4 BOX. WIRE USING
2. STRIKE COLUMN MOUNTED CAR RIDING LANTERNS: FACTORY EMERGENCY EXIT

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

CAR LANTERN IS SUPPLIED WITH WIRING HARNESS FACTORY HARNESS.
CONNECTED INTO LANTERN ASSY. TO INSTALL, DISCONNECT
HARNESS FROM LANTERN NOTING ORDER OF CONNECTIONS
AND WIRE LABELING. WIRE ENDS MUST BE ROUTED FROM
SWING RETURN THROUGH HEADER CHANNEL TO HEADER END
CAP, THROUGH FLEX CONDUIT AND INTO FIXTURE BOX.
RECONNECT WIRES IN ORIGINAL ORDER. ATTACH HARNESS 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM LIGHT
CONNECTOR TO LANTERN IN FRONT MAIN SWING IF IT EXIST, BOX TO FAN. STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
EACH END. (FIELD WIRED)
OTHERWISE CONNECT TO CWI BOARD.
3. FOR LEFT AND RIGHT HAND DOORS, MOUNT MICROLIGHT
EDGE TO STRIKE COLUMN.

NOTE: WITH TWO LIGHT FIXTURES USE

1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM LIGHT
BOX TO LIGHT BOX. STRAIGHT
CONNECTOR EACH END. (FIELD WIRED)

1 - 45
MICROLIGHT EDGE CONTROLLER MOUNTED
TO DOOR OPERATOR WELDMENT. 1/2" FLEX
CONDUIT FROM CONTROLLER TO DOOR OPERATOR.
CONNECT WIRES TO TERMINAL STRIP IN DOOR PLUG ALL UNUSED HOLES
OPERATOR.

END CAP (TYP.)

FACTORY SELECTOR HARNESS

1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM 90 DEG.
CONNECTOR AT LIGHT BOX TO CONNECTOR AT PHOTO EYE TO 90 DEG.
CABLE FROM END CAP TO MICROLIGHT
90 DEG. CONNECTOR AT HEADER. CONNECTOR AT END CAP.
ON LEADING EDGE OF DOOR OR ON
(FIELD WIRED) FOR LEFT AND RIGHT HAND DOORS MOUNT
STRIKE COLUMN. (SEE NOTE 3)
PHOTO EYE TO STRIKE COLUMN.
Please see the Cab Installation manual for further details.

PHOTO EYE CONDUIT MAY ALSO BE ROUTED

CABLE TO SAFETY EDGE. UNDER PLATFORM BEHIND TOE GUARD THRU
CONNECT OTHER END RETURN BOX INTO HEADER. (FIELD WIRED)
THRU GROMMET IN HOLE
ON DOOR OPERATOR.
(FIELD WIRED)

SAFETY EDGES AND/OR PHOTO EYE USE 1/2" FLEX

CONDUIT STRAIGHT AND 90 DEG. CONNECTORS AS
REQUIRED FROM HEADER TO DOOR OPERATOR.
(FIELD WIRED)
1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
MOUNT SWING RETURN BOX TO PLATFORM AT CAR RIDING LANTERN BOX TO 90 DEG.
OVER ACCESS HOLE. MOUNT GROMMET IN FACTORY DOOR OPERATOR HARNESS. CONNECTOR AT HEADER END CAP. CABLE FROM END CAP TO MICROLIGHT
HOLE IN RETURN BOX COVER. ROUTE (SEE NOTE 2) ON LEADING EDGE OF DOOR OR ON
TRAVELING CABLE THROUGH COVER, BOX STRIKE COLUMN. (SEE NOTE 3)
AND ACCESS HOLE TO SWING RETURN.
MOUNT GROMMET STRIP IN ACCESS
HOLE IN TOP OF SWING RETURN.
Car Top Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

NOTES:
1. PHOTO EYE AND SAFETY EDGE CABLES WIRE TO EMERGENCY EXIT SWITCH
TERMINAL STRIP INSIDE DOOR OPERATOR. (FIELD WIRED)
2. SOFFIT MOUNTED CAR LANTERN: 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT
Cimarron Car Top Wiring

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

CAR LANTERN IS PROVIDED WITH WIRE HARNESS CONNECTOR AT EMERGENCY EXIT
CONNECTED TO LANTERN FIXTURE. TO INSTALL ON SWITCH TO 90 DEG. CONNECTOR
CIMARRON, DISCONNECT HARNESS FROM LANTERN AT 4 x 4 BOX. WIRE USING
NOTING ORDER OF CONNECTION AND WIRE LABELING. FACTORY EMERGENCY EXIT
HARNESS.
WIRE ENDS MUST BE ROUTED FROM SWING RETURN
THROUGH JUNCTION BOX, THROUGH FLEX CONDUIT,
AND INTO OUTLET BOX. RECONNECT WIRES IN ORIGINAL
ORDER. ATTACH HARNESS CONNECTOR TO CWI BOARD
CONNECTOR IN SWING RETURN. 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM LIGHT
3. FOR LEFT AND RIGHT HAND DOORS, MOUNT BOX TO FAN. STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
MICROLIGHT EDGE TO STRIKE COLUMN. EACH END. (FIELD WIRED)

1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT

CONNECTOR AT LIGHT BOX TO
90 DEG. CONNECTOR AT JUNCTION
BOX. (FIELD WIRED)

MICROLIGHT EDGE CONTROLLER MOUNTED OUTLET BOX INSTALLED OVER SOFFIT

TO DOOR OPERATOR WELDMENT. 1/2" FLEX MOUNTED LANTERN. DRILL HOLE IN
CONDUIT FROM CONTROLLER TO DOOR OPERATOR. CHANNEL IN ORDER TO FEED WIRE
CONNECT WIRES TO TERMINAL STRIP IN DOOR
OPERATOR.
TO OUTLET BOX FROM LANTERN.

1 - 46
1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM 90 DEG.
CONNECTOR AT PHOTO EYE TO 90
DEG. CONNECTOR AT DOOR OPERATOR.
FACTORY SELECTOR HARNESS (FIELD WIRED)

CABLE TO MICROLIGHT EDGE CABLE FROM END CAP TO

MICROLIGHT ON LEADING
CABLE TO SAFETY EDGE. CONNECT EDGE OF DOOR OR ON STRIKE
OTHER END THRU GROMMET IN COLUMN. (SEE NOTE 3)
HOLE ON DOOR OPERATOR
(FIELD WIRED)
FACTORY DOOR OPERATOR HARNESS.
1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM 90 DEG. CONNECTOR AT JUNCTION
JUNCTION BOX. MOUNT GROMMET STRIP IN ACCESS BOX TO STRAIGHT CONNECTOR AT OUTLET BOX.
HOLE IN TOP OF SWING RETURN
MOUNT SWING RETURN BOX TO PLATFORM OVER
ACCESS HOLE. MOUNT GROMMET IN HOLE IN
RETURN BOX COVER. ROUTE TRAVELING CABLE
THROUGH COVER, BOX AND ACCESS HOLE
TO SWING RETURN.
Car Top Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

CABLE TO SAFETY EDGE.

CONNECT OTHER END
THRU GROMMET IN HOLE
ON DOOR OPERATOR.
(FIELD WIRED)
CABLE FROM END CAP TO MICROLIGHT
ON LEADING EDGE OF DOOR OR ON

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

STRIKE COLUMN. (SEE NOTE 3)

1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT

CONNECTOR AT EMERGENCY EXIT
SWITCH TO 90 DEG. CONNECTOR
AT HEADER USING FACTORY HARNESS.
Selective Doors Car Top Wiring

NOTES:
1. PHOTO EYE AND SAFETY EDGE CABLES WIRE TO TERMINAL STRIP
INSIDE DOOR OPERATOR. EMERGENCY
EXIT
2. STRIKE COLUMN MOUNTED CAR RIDING LANTERNS: SWITCH
CAR LANTERN IS SUPPLIED WITH WIRING HARNESS, FACTORY (FIELD WIRED)
SPLICED LANTERN ASSEMBLY. TO INSTALL, LABEL AND CUT (3)
WIRES NEAR EXISTING SPLICES. WIRE ENDS MUST BE ROUTED
FROM SWING RETURN THROUGH HEADER CHANNEL TO HEADER
END CAP, THROUGH FLEX CONDUIT AND INTO FIXTURE BOX. ROUTE AUXILLARY SWING
USE (3) CLOSED END SPLICE CONNECTORS TO RECONNECT HARNESS THROUGH 3/4" FLEX.
WIRES IN ORIGIANL ORDER. ATTACH HARNESS CONNECTOR TO USE 90 DEG. CONNECTOR AT
CWI BOARD HEADER IN SWING RETURN. HEADER AND A
1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM LIGHT STRAIGHT CONNECTOR
3. FOR LEFT AND RIGHT HAND DOORS, MOUNT MICROLIGHT EDGE TO AT WIREWAY.
BOX TO FAN. STRAIGHT
STRIKE COLUMN.
CONNECTOR EACH END.
(FIELD WIRED)

ROUTE REAR DOOR

NOTE: WITH TWO LIGHT FIXTURES OPERATOR HARNESS
USE 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM THROUGH 1" FLEX AND
1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT LIGHT BOX TO LIGHT BOX.
CONNECTOR AT LIGHT BOX TO CARTOP WIREWAY.

1 - 47
90 DEG. CONNECTOR AT HEADER. STRAIGHT CONNECTOR EACH
(FIELD WIRED) END. (FIELD WIRED)

MICROLIGHT EDGE CONTROLLER MOUNTED END CAP (TYP.)

TO DOOR OPERATOR WELDMENT. 1/2" FLEX
CONDUIT FROM CONTROLLER TO DOOR OPERATOR.
FACTORY SELECTOR HARNESS. CONNECT WIRES TO TERMINAL STRIP IN DOOR
OPERATOR. 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM STRAIGHT
PLUG ALL CONNECTOR AT CAR RIDING LANTERN
BOX TO 90 DEG. CONNECTOR AT
FACTORY DOOR UNUSED HOLES. HEADER END CAP. (SEE NOTE 2)
OPERATOR HARNESS.
CABLE FROM END CAP TO MICROLIGHT
ON LEADING EDGE OF DOOR OR ON
STRIKE COLUMN. (SEE NOTE 3) 1/2" FLEX CONDUIT FROM 90 DEG.
CONNECTOR AT PHOTO EYE TO 90 DEG.
CONNECTOR AT END CAP.
CABLE TO SAFETY EDGE. FOR LEFT AND RIGHT HAND DOORS MOUNT
CONNECT OTHER END PHOTO EYE TO STRIKE COLUMN.
THRU GROMMET IN HOLE PHOTO EYE CONDUIT MAY ALSO BE ROUTED
UNDER PLATFORM BEHIND TOE GAURD THRU
ON DOOR OPERATOR. RETURN BOX INTO HEADER. (FIELD WIRED)
(FIELD WIRED)
CABLE TO SAFETY EDGE.
CONNECT OTHER END
THRU GROMMET IN HOLE CABLE FROM END CAP TO MICROLIGHT
ON LEADING EDGE OF DOOR OR ON
ON DOOR OPERATOR. STRIKE COLUMN. (SEE NOTE 3)
MOUNT SWING RETURN BOX TO PLATFORM
OVER ACCESS HOLE. MOUNT GROMMET IN (FIELD WIRED)
HOLE IN RETURN BOX COVER. ROUTE
TRAVELING CABEL THROUGH COVER, BOX
AND ACCESS HOLE TO SWING RETURN. SAFETY EDGES AND/OR PHOTO EYE USE 1/2" FLEX
MOUNT GROMMET STRIP IN ACCESS CONDUIT STRAIGHT AND 90 DEG. CONNECTORS AS
HOLE IN TOP OF SWING RETURN. REQUIRED FROM HEADER TO DOOR OPERATOR.
(FIELD WIRED)
Car Top Wiring

Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Swing Return Wiring

Swing Return Wiring

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the lights and fan disconnect.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect for the controller.

3. Connect the traveling cable wires at the CWIL board per the job drawings.

4. Connect the car fan and light wiring per the job drawings.

5. Connect the following items at the CWIL board:

• Selector
• Door operator(s)

6. Turn OFF the AC switch on the CWIL board.

Figure 16 - CWIL P/N Card (6300 ABT)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 48 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Swing Return Wiring

Swing Return Wiring

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the lights and fan disconnect.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect for the controller.

3. Connect the traveling cable wires at the CWIL board per the job drawings.

4. Connect the car fan and light wiring per the job drawings.

5. Connect the following items at the CWIL board:

• Selector
• Door operator(s)

6. Turn OFF the AC switch on the CWIL board.

Figure 16 - CWIL Board (6300ABT)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 1 - 48 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustment

TAC32 Controller
Adjustment Procedures

Warning

The following procedures are intended for the use

of qualified and authorized personnel only. In the
interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do NOT attempt any procedure that you are
not qualified and authorized to perform.
The procedures in this manual must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules of the
latest edition of the National Electrical Code; the latest edition of ASME A17.1; and any governing
local codes.

All drawings and information herein are the proprietary property of ThyssenKrupp Elevator and are
loaned subject to return on demand and must not be made public or copied, nor used, directly or
indirectly, in any manner detrimental to the interest of ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

Every attempt has been made to ensure that this manual is as accurate and up-to-date as possible.
However, ThyssenKrupp Elevator assumes no liability for consequences resulting from any error or
omission. Please report any problems with this manual to the Technical Publications Department.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-1 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustment

Introduction

The pages of the TAC32 Controller Adjustment Procedures are identified as follows:

Introductory Pages: The section number (2), followed by a dash and a sequential capital letter. Example: 2-A.

Technical Information Section: The section number (2) followed by a dash and a sequential page number. Example: 2-1.

Figures and Tables are identified in sequential order, Table 1, Table 2,...etc.

Revision Bars: Each revised page included in this manual will have a vertical line (change bar) to the left of the text that has been
added or changed. The example at the left of this paragraph shows the size and position of the revision change bar.

Each procedure should be read carefully and completely before starting that procedure. Give special attention to all Cautions and
Warnings; see the Safety Precautions section for details. Follow all procedures in the order written.

All test equipment, supplies, and parts should be on hand prior to starting the Adjustment procedures. These should be
maintained in or near the machine room for future use.

ALL Standard Safety Precautions must be followed on the job site. See the Safety Precautions pertaining to TAC32 equipment.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-2 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustment

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program
Manual and the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment
safety information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-3 Printed in USA May, 2010

Adjustment TAC32 Controller

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program Manual and
the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety informa-
tion on installation and service.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-4 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustment

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Arrival of Equipment Receiving

Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage. Promptly report all visible damage to the
carrier. All shipping damage claims must be filed with the carrier.

Storing

During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator job site, precautions should be taken to protect
the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture, and temperature extremes.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-5 Printed in USA May, 2010

Adjustment TAC32 Controller

This page
intentionally
left blank.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-6 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustment

Contents
Page
Preliminary Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-09
I/O and Safety String Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Car Top Inspection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Selector Tape Magnet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Selector Tape and Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Magnet Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Bottom Slowdown Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Top Slowdown Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Door Operator Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Valve Preliminary Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
CAN Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Hoistway Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
UIT Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Door Setup and Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Valve Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Floor Position and Leveling Magnet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Terminal Slowdown Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Final Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

ESP100 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Solid State Starter Overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Operational Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Configuring the Serial PI Card (6300WR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Group Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-7 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustment

This page
intentionally
left blank.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-8 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Preliminary Adjustment

TAC32 Adjustment
Preliminary Adjustment

Temporary Operation Removal

1. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

2. Place the Car Top Inspection Switch in the INSP position, and the Stop Switch in the STOP
position.

3. If present, remove the temporary run box.

4. Remove all temporary orange jumpers: 134 to MCC1 and MUTS to USS1, or 134 to USS1 and
MCC1.

5. Install plugs 9a, 19, 20, and 21 to the corresponding connectors on the IOD board.

6. Remove any remaining temporary jumpers.

7. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

8. Confirm that the Watchdog (WD) on the CPUA is illuminated.

CPUA Board

IOD Board

Figure 1 - CPUA 6300XE1 on the IOD 6300ACJ1

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2-9 Printed in USA May, 2010

Preliminary Adjustment TAC32 Controller

Preliminary Adjustment
(continued)
9. Confirm that the AC, P24, P24GS and P24G LED's are illuminated. See Figure 2, Detail A.

Detail A

AC P24 P24G

See Detail A P24GS

Figure 2 - IOD Board Illuminated LED’s

I/O and Safety String Checkout

IMPORTANT! Ensure that all temporary jumpers have been removed before starting this section.

1. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

2. Place the Stop Switch in the RUN position.
3. Select REAL TIME MOTION BLOCK -> ENT -> QUICK COMMANDS; scroll to SHOW IO.
4. Use the UIT to verify the I/O Port # and the Correct I/O Pattern listed in the following chart, or
refer to the job Car I/O Assignment sheet included in the job diagram package.
5. Correct any signals/circuits that are not correct before proceeding (see job wiring diagrams if
required).

I/O Port # Correct I/O Pattern

Port 1 01000101
Port 2 00000000
Port 3 11111111
Port 4 11111111
Port 5 010000XX X = Either this I/O location is unassigned or has a
Port 6 010000XX signal assigned whose status is not important right
Port 7 00XXX1XX now. Refer to the jobs Car I/O Assignment sheet (if
Port 8 XXXX0100 required).
Port 10 XXXXXXX1
Port 17 00000101

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 10 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Selector Tape Magnet Installation

I/O and Safety String

Checkout
(continued) 6. Confirm that the SPGood, NPGOOD, and PLDGOOD LED’s are green.

a. If the LEDs are green, proceed to the next section (Car Top Inspection Operation).

b. If the SPGood and Bad LEDs are red, use the following procedure Configure the SP.

Configure the SP
1. Set the SP jumper (JP2) to the configure / programing position of 1 and 2. From the UIT, issue
the SPC command.

2. Restore the SP jumper (JP2) to the automatic position of 2 and 3.

3. Confirm that the SPGood LED is green.

Note: If any of the LED’s are not green, use the job wiring diagrams to correct the issue before
proceeding.

Car Top Inspection

Operation 1. Place the swing return power switch in the ON position.

2. Verify that the car will not run with the car top stop switch in the STOP position.

3. Place the car top RUN/STOP switch in the RUN position.

4. Verify that the car will only run UP when the UP and SAFE buttons are pressed.

5. Verify that the car will only run DOWN when the DOWN and SAFE buttons are pressed.

6. Verify that the car will not run with the car or any hoistway door open.

7. Verify that the car will not run when any contact in the safety circuit is opened.

8. Place the AUTO / INSP switch in the AUTO position.

Be prepared for unexpected car motion when AUTO / INSP is placed in the AUTO
position.

Selector Tape Magnet Installation

Selector Tape and
Box Inspection 1. Inspect and clean the selector tape. Use a wire brush to remove cement, drywall, mud, etc.,
and use fine sandpaper (400 grit) to remove nicks and burrs.

2. After cleaning, wipe down the tape with a clean rag. If the tape cannot be completely cleaned,
it MUST be replaced.

3. Inspect the selector box for damage or defects. The guides must be free of dirt, not binding on
the tape, or be extremely loose.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 11 Printed in USA May, 2010

Bottom Slowdown Magnet Placement TAC32 Controller

Magnet Placement • Slowdown and directional magnets are placed on the side of the tape facing away from the car
(back side). See Figure 3.
• Floor level magnets are the only magnets placed on the front (or car side) of the tape.
• Handed references are noted as if facing the tape from the car.
• The magnets have their magnetic south marked with a bright yellow stripe. The yellow-striped
south side faces out, and should be visible for all tape magnets except the top floor NTSD
magnets.

MAGNET INSTALLATION
LEVELING MAGNETS
View is from the car side of tape.
Magnets are on the front side of tape.

Example
Regular Leveling
Regular Leveling Magnet Placement with a
Magnet Placement 5” Close Landing

Magnet Template Magnet Template

814CH1 TOP OF TAPE
814CH1 TOP OF TAPE
SELECTOR BOX SELECTOR BOX

THIS END UP
3.750 in. THIS END UP
3.750 in.
THIS SIDE OF THIS SIDE OF

8.000
TEMPLATE AWAY TEMPLATE AWAY
FROM TAPE FROM TAPE
ThyssenKrupp Elevator

ThyssenKrupp Elevator
7.750 in.
LEVELING MAGNET FOR CLOSE LANDING

LEVELING MAGNET (ONE AT EACH LANDING EXCEPT CLOSE LANDING)

LEVELING MAGNET FOR CLOSE LANDING

LEVELING MAGNET (ONE AT EACH LANDING EXCEPT CLOSE LANDING)

Leveling
Magnet 7.750 in.
(close landing 5.000 in.
COPYRIGHT 2009

COPYRIGHT 2009
CL only) CL
TEMPLATE PART NUMBER 814CH001

TEMPLATE PART NUMBER 814CH001

FOR USE WITH CAN-BUS TAPE

FOR USE WITH CAN-BUS TAPE

SELECTOR, TAC32 CONTROL.

SELECTOR, TAC32 CONTROL.

A A
A A

8.000 Leveling Magnet

8.000
INSTALL THIS FIRST
Leveling Outline of
Outline of
Magnet Selector Box
Selector Box

The Alignment Tool (850 PE1) may be used to verify

the side-to-side position of the magnets. 8.000 8.000
Leveling Leveling
MAGNETS .531" Magnet South (Yellow Stripe) Magnet
(close CAR SIDE
Alignment Tool
landing
SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1) only) SECTION A-A

Figure 3 - Magnet Locations

Bottom Slowdown Magnet Placement

Note: For all steps in these procedures, see the correct FPM Bottom Floor Magnet Placement
Diagrams Page 14 through Page 18.
1. Place the car at floor level, at the bottom floor.
2. Make a mark – Reference Mark (B) – across the front of the tape level using the top of
the plastic selector box.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 12 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Bottom Slowdown Magnet Placement

Bottom Slowdown
Magnet Placement
(continued) 3. Move the car out of the way to provide access to the immediate area around Reference Mark
(B).
4. Make a mark - Reference Mark (C) - for the master magnet for the bottom floor slowdown
magnet (this measurement is based on the car’s maximum down speed FPM).
5. Position the top of an 8" magnet at Reference Mark (C) on the left-rear tape track.
Note: Use the 850PE1 Magnet Alignment Tool for correct magnet placement: the proper left-right
position on the tape, with the yellow stripe facing outwards and visible.

6. Stack 8" magnets below the master magnet placed in Step 5, and continue downwards into
the pit.
Note: The slowdown magnets must extend far enough so that they are still seen when the car is on
the compressed buffers; depending on pit depth and runby, this is typically a quantity of 2 to
7 total magnets.

Bottom Directional Limit

1. Measure from Reference Mark (B) downwards 9 1/4” and create an additional Reference Mark
(A) on the tape.
2. Place an 8" magnet at Reference Mark (B), and continue stacking the magnets end-to-end
downwards into the pit.
Notes:
• The magnets must extend far enough so that they are still seen when the car is on the
compressed buffers; depending on pit depth and runby, the quantity will vary (normally
two 8" magnets).
• Use the 850PE1 Magnet Alignment Tool to place the magnets into the proper left-right
position on the tape – the yellow stripe facing outwards and visible.

Bottom Floor Leveling Magnet

1. Place the TAC32 Magnet Template onto the tape, aligning its top with Reference Mark (B).
2. Install one 8" leveling magnet onto the right tape track (or the left track if this is a rear close
landing).
Note: The yellow stripe is to face outwards and be visible.

Intermediate Floor Leveling Magnets (Jobs with 3 Stops or More)

1. Place the car at floor level at each intermediate floor, proceeding upwards.
2. At each floor level, create Reference Mark (B).
3. Move the car down and place the TAC32 Magnet Template onto the tape, aligning its top with
Reference Mark (B) for that floor.
4. Install one 8" leveling magnet onto the right tape track (or the left track if this is a rear close
landing).
Note: The yellow stripe is to face outwards and be visible.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 13 Printed in USA May, 2010

 50 and 75 FPM
BOTTOM MAGNET INSTALLATION
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
Use This Layout THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. Use This Layout
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. If less than or equal to 15 inches
50 and 75 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

MARK B (top of selector box) MARK B (top of selector box)

Bottom Slowdown Magnets
50 and 75 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

MARK C (top of slowdown magnet) MARK C (top of slowdown magnet)

Bottom Slowdown Magnets (on back side of tape,
(on back side of tape, 1.000 in. with the south (yellow stripe) 1.000 in.
with the south (yellow stripe) facing away from the tape.
facing away from the tape.

9.250 in. 9.250 in.

Outline of Outline of Selector Box
Selector Box Selector Box 15.5 inches high
South (Yellow Stripe)

2 - 14
Slowdown Directional
Magnet(s) Limit
MARK A (top of Magnet(s) MARK A (top of
directional directional
limit magnets) CAR SIDE Three limit magnets)
SECTION A-A 8-inch
Four magnets
8-inch Three A A
magnets 8-inch Two
magnets 8-inch
magnets
1.000
If final limits are required,
Slowdown and Directional .531
limit magnets must overlap
A A the final limit actuation by at
least one inch. The final limit
should actuate here.
If final limits are required, 1.000
Slowdown and Directional .531
limit magnets must overlap
the final limit actuation by at MAGNETS .531"
least one inch. The final limit Alignment Tool
should actuate here. SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1)
TAC32 Controller

Printed in USA May, 2010

 TAC32 Controller

100 FPM
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT BOTTOM MAGNET INSTALLATION
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
Use This Layout THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required.
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. Use This Layout
If less than or equal to 15 inches
MARK C (top of MARK C (top
slowdown magnet) of slowdown magnet)

Bottom Slowdown Magnets Bottom Slowdown Magnets

5.000 in. 5.000 in.
(on back side of tape, (on back side of tape, MARK B (top of
MARK B (top of
with the south (yellow stripe) with the south (yellow stripe) selector box)
selector box)
facing away from the tape. facing away from the tape.
100 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

9.250 in. 9.250 in.

Outline of South (Yellow Stripe) Selector Box is
Selector Box Slowdown Directional 15. 5 inches high
Magnet(s) Limit
Magnet(s)
Outline of

2 - 15
Selector Box
MARK A (top of CAR SIDE MARK A (top of
directional SECTION A-A directional
limit magnets) Four limit magnets)
Five 8-inch
8-inch Three magnets
magnets 8-inch A A
Two
magnets 8-inch
magnets
1.000
If final limits are required,
Slowdown and Directional
limit magnets must overlap .531
the final limit actuation by at
A A least one inch. The final limit
should actuate here.
1.000
If final limits are required,
Slowdown and Directional
limit magnets must overlap .531
MAGNETS .531"
the final limit actuation by at
Alignment Tool
least one inch. The final limit
should actuate here. SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1)
100 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

Printed in USA May, 2010

 125 FPM
BOTTOM MAGNET INSTALLATION
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
Use This Layout DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. Use This Layout
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. If less than or equal to 15 inches
125 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit.
MARK C (top
MARK C (top of Bottom Slowdown Magnets of slowdown magnet)
Bottom Slowdown Magnets slowdown magnet) (on back side of tape, 10.000 in.
(on back side of tape, with the south (yellow stripe)
10.000 in.
with the south (yellow stripe) facing away from the tape.
facing away from the tape. South (Yellow Stripe)
Slowdown Directional MARK B (top of
Magnet(s) Limit
125 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

MARK B (top of Magnet(s) selector box)

selector box)
CAR SIDE
Outline of SECTION A-A 9.250 in.
Selector Box
9.250 in. Selector Box is
Outline of

2 - 16
Selector Box 15.5 inches high

Five MARK A (top of directional

8-inch limit magnets)
MARK A (top of directional
magnets
limit magnets)
Six Two
8-inch 8-inch
magnets Three magnets
8-inch If final limits are required,
magnets Slowdown and Directional A A
limit magnets must overlap 1.000
the final limit actuation by at
least one inch. The final limit .531
should actuate here.

A A

If final limits are required, 1.000

Slowdown and Directional .531 MAGNETS .531"
limit magnets must overlap Alignment Tool
the final limit actuation by at (850PE1)
least one inch. The final limit SELECTOR TAPE
should actuate here.
TAC32 Controller

Printed in USA May, 2010

 150 FPM
TAC32 Controller

JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT

BOTTOM MAGNET INSTALLATION
View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
Use This Layout THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. Use This Layout
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. If less than or equal to 15 inches

MARK C (top of MARK C (top of

Bottom Slowdown Magnets slowdown magnet) Bottom Slowdown Magnets
slowdown magnet)
(on back side of tape, (on back side of tape,
with the south (yellow stripe) with the south (yellow stripe)
facing away from the tape. facing away from the tape.
15.000 in. 15.000 in.
150 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

South (Yellow Stripe)

Slowdown Directional
MARK B (top of Magnet(s) Limit MARK B (top of
Magnet(s)
selector box) selector box)
CAR SIDE

2 - 17
SECTION A-A Outline of
Outline of 9.250 in. 9.250 in.
Selector Box
Selector Box Selector Box is
Five 15.5 inches high
8-inch
magnets MARK A (top of
MARK A (top of directional limit
Six
directional MAGNETS .531" magnets)
8-inch
limit magnets) Alignment Tool
magnets
SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1)
Two
Three 8-inch
8-inch magnets
magnets
A A A A

.531
If final limits are required, 1.000
Slowdown and Directional
limit magnets must overlap If final limits are required,
the final limit actuation by at Slowdown and Directional
least one inch. The final limit 1.000 limit magnets must overlap
should actuate here. the final limit actuation by at
.531 least one inch. The final limit
should actuate here.
150 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

Printed in USA May, 2010

 175 and 200 FPM
BOTTOM MAGNET INSTALLATION
View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Use This Layout Use This Layout
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. If less than or equal to 15 inches
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required.
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit.
MARK C (top of
Bottom Slowdown Magnets slowdown magnet)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

MARK C (top of (on back side of tape,
Bottom Slowdown Magnets with the south (yellow stripe)
slowdown magnet)
(on back side of tape, facing away from the tape.
with the south (yellow stripe)
facing away from the tape.
South (Yellow Stripe)
Slowdown Directional
Magnet(s) Limit
175 and 200 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

Magnet(s)
23.000 in.
CAR SIDE
23.000 in.
SECTION A-A

MARK B
(top of selector box)
MARK B (top of

2 - 18
175 and 200 FPM Bottom Magnet Installation

selector box)
Six Selector Box is
Seven 8-inch 15.5 inches high
8-inch 9.250 in. magnets 9.250 in.
magnets

Outline of Outline of
Selector Box MARK A (top of Selector Box MARK A (top of
directional
directional
limit magnets)
limit magnets)
Three
8-inch
magnets MAGNETS .531"
A A Two
Alignment Tool 8-inch
SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1) magnets
1.000

If final limits are required, A A .531

Slowdown and Directional
limit magnets must overlap
the final limit actuation by at
1.000 If final limits are required,
least one inch. The final limit Slowdown and Directional
should actuate here.
.531 limit magnets must overlap
the final limit actuation by at
least one inch. The final limit
should actuate here.
TAC32 Controller

Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Top Slowdown Magnet Placement

Top Slowdown Magnet Placement

Note: For all steps in these procedures, see the correct FPM Top Floor Magnet Placement
Diagrams Page 20 through Page 24.
1. Place the car at floor level, at the top floor.
2. Make a mark – Reference Mark (Y) – across the front of the tape level using the top of the plas-
tic selector box.
3. Move the car out of the way to provide access to the immediate area around Reference Mark
(Y).
4. Make a mark - Reference Mark (Z) of the master magnet for the top floor slowdown magnet.
This measurement is based on the car’s maximum down speed FPM.
5. Position the top of an 8" magnet at Reference Mark (Z) on the left-rear tape track.
Note: Use the 850PE1 Magnet Alignment Tool for correct magnet placement: the proper left-right
position on the tape, with the yellow stripe facing the tape and NOT VISIBLE.
6. Stack 8" magnets above the master magnet placed in Step 5, and continue upwards into the
overhead.
Note: The slowdown magnets must extend far enough up so that they are still seen when the car
is at its maximum travel (Stop Ring); depending on hatch overhead dimensions and runby,
the quantity is typically 4 to 7 total magnets.
Top Directional Limit
1. Measure from Reference Mark (Y) downwards 6 1/4” and create an additional Reference Mark
(X) Line on the tape.
2. Place an 8" magnet at Reference Mark (X), and continue stacking the magnets end-to-end
upwards into the overhead.
Notes:
• The magnets must extend far enough so that they are still seen with the car at its maxi-
mum travel (Stop Ring); depending on pit depth and runby, the quantity will vary (normally
two 8" magnets).
• Use the 850PE1 Magnet Alignment Tool to place the magnets into the proper left-right
position on the tape – the yellow stripe facing outwards and visible.
Top Floor Leveling Magnet
1. Place the TAC32 Magnet Template (Part Number 814 CH001) onto the tape, aligning its top
with Reference Mark (Y).
2. Install one 8" leveling magnet onto the right tape track (or the left track if this is a rear close
landing).
Note: The yellow stripe is to face outwards and be visible.

Directional Limit Magnet Placement Verification

1. Run the car on Car Top Inspection downwards into the pit to check the Bottom Directional
Limit. The car should stop, at the limit, on its own 1" to 1.5" past floor level.
Note: To achieve this limit setting, correct the magnet placement (as required).
2. Run the car on Car Top Inspection upwards into the overhead to check the Top Directional
Limit. The car should stop, at the limit, on its own 1" to 1.5" past floor level. Correct magnet
placement as required to achieve this limit setting.
Note: To achieve this limit setting, correct the magnet placement as follows:
• When on the bottom DL, the LVD I/O must be OFF.
• When on the top DL, the LVL I/O must be OFF.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 19 Printed in USA May, 2010

 50 and 75 FPM
TOP MAGNET INSTALLATION
View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.

JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT

THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL *Note difference with respect to bottom magnet
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING *North (No Stripe) South (Yellow Stripe) JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
Use This Layout Directional
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
Slowdown

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. Magnet(s) Limit DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. Magnet(s) Use This Layout
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. CAR SIDE If less than or equal to 15 inches
50 and 75 FPM Top Magnet Installation

SECTION A-A

If final limits are required,

.531 MAGNETS .531"
Slowdown and Directional
limit magnets must overlap Alignment Tool
If final limits are required,
the final limit actuation by at 1.000 SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1) Slowdown and Directional
least one inch. The final limit limit magnets must overlap
should actuate here. the final limit actuation by at
least one inch. The final limit
A A should actuate here. .531
50 and 75 FPM Top Magnet Installation

1.000
Three 8-inch
magnets
Two 8-inch magnets
A A

2 - 20
MARK Y (top of MARK Y
selector box) (top of selector box)

Outline of
6.250 in. 6.250 in.
Selector Box Outline of Selector Box

MARK X (bottom of
directional
Five 8-inch MARK X (bottom of Four 8-inch magnets limit magnets)
magnets directional limit magnets)
11.250 in. 11.250 in.

Top Slowdown Magnets

(on back side of tape, Top Slowdown Magnets
MARK Z (bottom of (on back side of tape,
north facing away from tape, MARK Z (bottom of
slowdown magnet) north facing away from tape,
yellow stripe against tape). slowdown magnet)
yellow stripe against tape).
TAC32 Controller

Printed in USA May, 2010

 100 FPM
TAC32 Controller

TOP MAGNET INSTALLATION

JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
*Note difference with respect to bottom magnet THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
Use This Layout *North (No Stripe) South (Yellow Stripe)
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. Slowdown Directional Use This Layout

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

Magnet(s) Limit If less than or equal to 15 inches
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. Magnet(s)
If final limits are required, CAR SIDE
Slowdown and Directional
limit magnets must overlap SECTION A-A
the final limit actuation by at
least one inch. The final limit .531
If final limits are required,
should actuate here.
1.000 MAGNETS .531" Slowdown and Directional
Alignment Tool limit magnets must overlap
(850PE1)
the final limit actuation by at
100 FPM Top Magnet Installation

SELECTOR TAPE least one inch. The final limit

A A should actuate here.
.531

1.000
Three 8-inch Two
magnets A A 8-inch magnets

MARK Y (top of MARK Y

selector box) Outline of Selector Box (top of selector box)

2 - 21
6.250 in. 6.250 in.
Outline of
Selector Box

Five
MARK X (bottom of Five MARK X (bottom of
8-inch
directional limit magnets) 8-inch directional limit magnets)
magnets magnets

19.250 in. 19.250 in.

Top Slowdown Magnets
Top Slowdown Magnets (on back side of tape,
MARK Z (bottom of north facing away from tape,
(on back side of tape, slowdown magnet) yellow stripe against tape). MARK Z (bottom of
north facing away from tape,
slowdown magnet)
yellow stripe against tape).
100 FPM Top Magnet Installation

Printed in USA May, 2010

 125 FPM
TOP MAGNET INSTALLATION
View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
*Note difference with respect to bottom magnet JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
*North (No Stripe) South (Yellow Stripe)
Use This Layout THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. Slowdown Directional DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Magnet(s) Limit

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. Magnet(s)
Use This Layout
125 FPM Top Magnet Installation

The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. If less than or equal to 15 inches
CAR SIDE
If final limits are required, SECTION A-A
Slowdown and Directional .531
limit magnets must overlap
the final limit actuation by at MAGNETS .531"
least one inch. The final limit 1.000 If final limits are required,
Alignment Tool
should actuate here. Slowdown and Directional
SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1) limit magnets must overlap
125 FPM Top Magnet Installation

the final limit actuation by at

A A least one inch. The final limit
should actuate here. .531
MARK Y (top of
selector box)
1.000

Three 8-inch
A A Two 8-inch magnets
magnets
MARK Y
Outline of

2 - 22
(top of selector box)
Selector Box
6.250 in.
6.250 in.
Outline of
Selector Box
MARK X (bottom of
Six 8-inch
directional limit magnets)
magnets MARK X (bottom
Five
of directional
8-inch
limit magnets)
magnets
24.250 in.
24.250 in.

Top Slowdown Magnets

Top Slowdown Magnets (on back side of tape,
(on back side of tape, north facing away from tape,
north facing away from tape, yellow stripe against tape).
yellow stripe against tape).
MARK Z (bottom of
slowdown magnet) MARK Z (bottom of
slowdown magnet)
TAC32 Controller

Printed in USA May, 2010

 150 FPM
TAC32 Controller

TOP MAGNET INSTALLATION

JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING *Note difference with respect to bottom magnet JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
Use This Layout *North (No Stripe) South (Yellow Stripe) THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. Directional
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Slowdown

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required. Magnet(s) Limit Use This Layout
The selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. Magnet(s) If less than or equal to 15 inches
CAR SIDE

SECTION A-A
.531
If final limits are required,
If final limits are required, 1.000 MAGNETS .531" Slowdown and Directional
Slowdown and Directional Alignment Tool limit magnets must overlap
limit magnets must overlap the final limit actuation by at
the final limit actuation by at SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1)
150 FPM Top Magnet Installation

least one inch. The final limit

least one inch. The final limit A A should actuate here.
should actuate here. .531
Three 8-inch
magnets 1.000

Two 8-inch magnets

A A
MARK Y (top of MARK Y (top of selector box)
selector box)

Outline of

2 - 23
6.250 in. Selector Box 6.250 in.
Outline of
Selector Box

MARK X (bottom of
directional limit magnets) MARK X (bottom of
Five 8-inch directional limit magnets)
magnets Six 8-inch
magnets

Top Slowdown Magnets Top Slowdown Magnets

(on back side of tape, (on back side of tape,
north facing away from tape, north facing away from tape,
yellow stripe against tape). 29.250 in. yellow stripe against tape). 29.250 in.

MARK Z (bottom of MARK Z (bottom of

slowdown magnet) slowdown magnet)
150 FPM Top Magnet Installation

Printed in USA May, 2010

 175 and 200 FPM
TOP MAGNET INSTALLATION
View is from car side of tape; Magnets are on back side of tape.
JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL *Note difference with respect to bottom magnet
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING JOB SPECIFIC TRAVEL LIMIT
*North (No Stripe) South (Yellow Stripe)
Use This Layout THE EXTREME LIMIT OF CAR TRAVEL
Slowdown Directional
If greater than 15 inches or less than or equal to 23 inches. Limit
DOWN PAST THE BOTTOM LANDING
Magnet(s)
Note: If greater than 23 inches, additional magnets will be required.The Magnet(s) Use This Layout
selector sensors must not run off of the magnets at the extreme travel limit. If less than or equal to 15 inches
CAR SIDE

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator

SECTION A-A
If final limits are required, .531
Slowdown and Directional MAGNETS .531"
If final limits are required,
limit magnets must overlap 1.000 Slowdown and Directional
the final limit actuation by at Alignment Tool
limit magnets must overlap
175 and 200 FPM Top Magnet Installation

least one inch. The final limit SELECTOR TAPE (850PE1) the final limit actuation by at
should actuate here. least one inch. The final limit
A A should actuate here. .531
Three 8-inch
magnets 1.000
Two 8-inch magnets
A A
MARK Y (top
MARK Y (top of
of selector box)
selector box)
175 and 200 FPM Top Magnet Installation

Outline of
Selector Box
6.250 in. 6.250 in.

2 - 24
Outline of
Selector Box

MARK X (bottom of
directional limit magnets) MARK X (bottom
Eight of directional limit
Seven
8-inch magnets)
8-inch
magnets
magnets

Top Slowdown Magnets

(on back side of tape,
north facing away from tape,
Top Slowdown Magnets 37.250 in. 37.250 in.
yellow stripe against tape).
(on back side of tape,
north facing away from tape,
yellow stripe against tape).

MARK Z (bottom of MARK Z (bottom of

slowdown magnet) slowdown magnet)
TAC32 Controller

Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation

Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation

Door Operator Refer to the appropriate door operator component manual for this job, and complete all of
Adjustments the following adjustments:
• Mechanical setup
• Limit setting
• Card configuration and setup
Note: The door operator's limits (DOL, DCL) must be correctly adjusted prior to the
Hoistway Setup Procedure.

Valve Preliminary The Valve Preliminary Settings and Adjustment Procedures must be completed before starting
Setup a Hoistway Setup. For further information see the I-2 ®/ I-3 ® Valve component manual.

CAN Nodes The CAN Signal Fixture and Safety system nodes must be installed and completely wired (CWIL,
Selector, HNB's, HN's, CN's, etc) before beginning the CAN portions of the Startup Wizard.

Hoistway Setup Before the car can run on Automatic Operation, the selector must scan (count) the number of selec-
tor tape holes between floors. Any time a leveling magnet or terminal limit switch is moved, the
hoistway must be scanned again.

Startup Wizard The Startup Wizard will setup and configure all CAN nodes, perform a hoistway scan, and execute
job archive functions. Upon successful completion, the TAC32 System will be on automatic opera-
tion. For more information about the UIT, see the Service Information section.

1. Press any button while ThyssenKrupp Elevator is displayed in the UIT window.
2. Enter the pin number - 1234144. See Figure 4.
Note: If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press the UP button until
ThyssenKruppElevator appears in the window, then re-enter the code.

1 2 3 4

The numbers on the buttons above are for

illustration and are not printed on the actual
UIT.

Figure 4 - UIT Main Menu Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 25 Printed in USA May, 2010

Startup Wizard TAC32 Controller

Startup Wizard Selector Setup

(continued) 1. Position the car on automatic operation at the bottom landing.
2. Set the door disconnect switch to the ON position.
Note: To verify, use the UIT to access the Motion Diagnostic Screen through the Real
Time Menu.
3. Use the UP and DN buttons to scroll to the Startup Wizard.
4. Press ENTER to select the Startup Wizard. See Figure 5.

Start Wizard?
UP-Yes DN-No

Figure 5 - Startup Wizard Screen

UIT Menu Tree

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 26 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Startup Wizard

Startup Wizard 5. Press Up.

(continued)
The UIT displays the function Toggle Teach Direction - This allows the direction change of the HN/
HNB node teach function, and only changed if the HN/HNB CAN node string is wired from bottom
up (bottom landing HNB Card wired directly to the CPU instead of the top HNB Card).
6. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.

The UIT displays the function Clear HN Config - This clears any existing configuration data from the
hoistway HN/HNB cards. It is always a good idea to perform this function.
7. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.

The UIT displays the function Teach Front HN - This performs the CAN Node teach function to all
front riser HN/HNB Cards.
8. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.
Note: All CN's and HN's must be taught and configured before attempting a hoistway scan. Before
proceeding, correct any failures.

The UIT displays the function Teach Rear HN - This executes the CAN Node teach function to all rear
riser HN/HNB Cards.
9. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or if no rear riser, press UP to continue to the next
option.

The UIT displays the function Config HN/CN’s - This performs the CAN Node Configuration function
to all CAN nodes on the job (all HN, HNB, CWIL, and CN cards).
10. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.

The UIT displays the function Verify All CN’s - This executes the CAN node verification for all CWIL/
CN cards.
11. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.

The UIT displays the function Verify Front HN - This performs the CAN node verification for all front
riser HN/HNB cards.
12. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.

The UIT displays the function Verify Rear HN - This performs the CAN node verification for all rear
riser HN/HNB cards.
13. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or if no rear riser, press UP to continue to the next
option.

The UIT displays the function Auto Hoistway Scan - This function will automatically run the car at
slow speed from the bottom to the top directional limit and scan the hoistway tape to learn floor lev-
els.
Note: To view the learned floor levels - COMMANDS->Commands-Common->FCP.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 27 Printed in USA May, 2010

Door Setup and Final Adjustments TAC32 Controller

Startup Wizard 14. Position the car on automatic close to the bottom floor, turn ON the door disconnect switch,
(continued) and press ENTER to begin the hoistway scan.
Notes:
• If the scan does not begin, the UIT displays an abort message with the reason the scan
failed to start, and the scan must be performed again.
• If the scan is successful, the UIT displays Complete and automatically saves the scan.

15. Turn OFF the door disconnect switch, and the car is on automatic operation.

The UIT displays the function Write to Flash - This function saves all settings and values to the
CPU’s card memory.
16. Press ENTER to perform this operation, or press UP to continue to the next option.

The UIT displays the function Save Job to USB - This archives the job’s controller CPU files to a USB
memory stick.
17. Press ENTER to perform this operation, press UP to continue to the next option, or press ESC to
exit the UIT.

Door Setup and

Final Adjustments Note: The hoistway setup procedure must be completed before the door setup can be performed.

Use the UIT to adjust the UDC Door Operator

1. Access the adjustment and diagnostic menus of the UIT:
BLOCK SELECT ADJUSTMENTS -> UDC Front Door
BLOCK SELECT ADJUSTMENTS -> UDC Rear Door

2. For all other door operators, refer to the appropriate door operator component manual, and
complete the final door adjustment procedures.

Valve
Adjustments See the I-2®/ I-3® Valve component manual for final valve adjustments.

Floor Position and

Leveling Magnet
Adjustment The valve must be fully adjusted before proceeding with the floor leveling adjustments.

1. Perform a floor survey to determine if the car is level at each floor after coming into the floor
from both the up and down directions.
Note: Perform a new hoistway scan if any floor is far enough out of level that it requires the 8"
magnet to be repositioned.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 28 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Terminal Slowdown Check

Floor Position and 2. When the magnet placement is correct, glue each magnet with two small beads of silicon
Leveling Magnet caulk. See Figure 6.
Adjustment
(continued)

Figure 6 - Glue Floor Magnets

Terminal Slowdown Check

1. Adjust the terminal slowdown magnets so that they activate 2" to 4" after the selector slow-
down. See Table 1.
Note: Selector slowdown hole count adjustments P17 and P18 are pre-set at the factory based on
the job speed per Table 1; these settings coincide with the terminal magnet placement
positions based on job speed.

EXAMPLE: Both up and down car speeds are 100 fpm. Table 1 shows that the up selector slow-
down is 939 counts (each count = 1/40”). Therefore, up terminal slowdown activates 18" to
20" before the landing. The down selector slowdown is 683 counts, therefore, the down termi-
nal slowdown activates 12" to 14" before the landing.

2. Use the UIT to verify the proper setting of the up terminal slowdown switch as follows:

a. Enter P17 to access the up slowdown adjustment and to display the current values. The dis-
played value represents the up selector slowdown hole count adjusted under the position
system adjustments. Record this value.

b. Change P17 to one-half of its current value.

c. Place the car on automatic operation, and make a full speed run to the top terminal floor.

Note: TSL1, TSL2, and NTST should activate (go low), stopping the car short of the floor or within
the leveling zone producing a selector fault. If the car stops past the relevel zone, adjust P17
so that slowdown magnets are encountered 2" to 4" before the selector slowdown. See
Table 1.

d. Change P17 to restore the original value recorded in Step 2a.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 29 Printed in USA May, 2010

Terminal Slowdown Check TAC32 Controller

Terminal Slowdown
Check 3. Use the UIT to verify the proper setting of the down terminal slowdown magnet as follows:
(continued) a. Enter P18 to access the down slowdown adjustment and display the current values. The dis-
played value represents the down selector slowdown count adjusted under the position sys-
tem adjustments. Record this value.
b. Change P18 to one-half of its current value.
c. Place the car on automatic, and make a full speed run into the bottom terminal floor.
Note: NTSB should activate, slow the car down, and stop it level with or slightly past the floor. If
the car stops past the re-level zone, these magnets should be adjusted to activate 2" to 4"
after the selector slowdown. See Table 1.
d. Change P18 to restore the original value recorded in Step 3a.

Car Up Adjustment Down Adjustment

Speed Slowdown Slowdown
Distance Distance
(fpm) Count Count
50 11" 470 8" 342
75 16" 683 12" 512
100 22" 939 16" 683
125 28" 1195 22" 939
150 34" 1451 28" 1195
175 42" 1792 34" 1451
200 50" 2134 42" 1792

Table 1 - Selector Slowdown Distance

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 30 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Final Adjustments

Final Adjustments
ESP100 Overload Overloads MUST undergo this procedure before the elevator is turned over to the customer.

1. Run the car up with a full load, and measure the stabilized running current at each sensing
loop.
Note: Take the measurements with a clamp-on AC ammeter connected directly below the sensing
loops.

2. Calculate the full load amps adjustment. The full load amps adjustment = the highest reading
in Step 1 + 10%.

3. Set the full load amps adjustment dial equal to the value calculated in Step 2. See Figure 7.

Figure 7 - ESP100 Overload Adjustment

4. Verify that the car will run the entire length of the hoistway with a full load.

The full load Amps adjustment must NOT be set outside the calibration range on the
overload's faceplate. To do so may prevent the overload from tripping and may also
damage the motor.

Solid State Starter

Overload Notes:
• The starter's display should read MOTOR STATUS STOPPED when the system is normal.
Reset the starter if it reads otherwise and, before continuing, correct any problem indi-
cated on the display. See Figure 8 for this and all following steps in this procedure.
• The starter's display will revert to MOTOR STATUS after 5 minutes of inactivity.

1. Verify that the Starting Amps = Motor Nameplate Amps x 3 (maximum setting).

2. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press the left arrow key. The STATUS menu displays.

3. Press the down arrow key twice to display PARAMETERS.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 31 Printed in USA May, 2010

Final Adjustments TAC32 Controller

Solid State Starter 4. Press the right arrow key. STARTING AMPS displays.
Overload • If the value is correct, continue with Step 5.
(continued)
• If the value is not correct, continue with Step 4.

5. Press the right arrow key again to access the value. Press the up or down arrow key to
adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press the right arrow key to move to the next digit.
Note: Be certain that the value is correct before pressing the left arrow key.

6. Press the left arrow key to save the value and exit STARTING AMPS.

7. Access the overload amps and verify it is set to the motor nameplate full load amps.

Top Line
Bottom Line

Scroll Up Button

Exit Menu /
Save Button Enter Menu Button

Scroll Down
Button

Figure 8 - Electronic Starter Display

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 32 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Operational Adjustments

Operational Adjustments
• To make the appropriate adjustments according to the job contract, use the UIT.
• To save the new adjustment values, issue the WRT command in the UIT menu: ADJUST
Menu->COMMAND Common->WRT.

Configuring the
Serial PI Card
(6300WR) The Serial PI card is a receive-only card that functions on RS485 communication derived from the
CN/CNA, CWIL, or HN/HNB. Its attached display is altered through Car Remote FAST commands
and requires jumper settings for hoistway applications and Fire Service.

There are 2 LEDs on the card - one indicates that 5VDC is available and a second LED shows the
status.

There are 4 buttons and 2 RJ11 connectors on the card. CON1 is for factory programming. CON2 is
for serial communication.

Connecting serial communication to CON1 will result in damage to the Serial PI card.

The SD, SB, and SF buttons are for factory testing purposes. The RST button is to reset the card.
Note: All traveling cable wires and hoistway wires must enter the controller cabinet on the same
side where the CPUA and IOD boards are located. See Figure 9.

Figure 9 - Traveling Cable and Hoistway Wires

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 33 Printed in USA May, 2010

Operational Adjustments TAC32 Controller

Configuring the
Serial PI Card
(6300WR)
(continued) SD, SB,
and SF

RST (Reset)

CON1
(Factory
Programmer
Only)

CON2
STAT LED
P5V LED

Figure 10 - Serial PI Card

Jumper Position Description

JP1 Off PI not at main landing
On PI at main landing to flash display on Fire Service
JP2 Off PI defined as for master car on HN
PI defined as shared car on HN
On Note: On only for the PI connected to CON10 PI-B on the HN
card (e.g., the second car)
JP3 Off Scrolling arrows off
On Scrolling arrows on
JP7 Off Default
On Lobby panels only
JP10 Off RS485 Termination resistor disabled
On RS485 Termination resistor enabled
JP11 Off CAN Shield not connected
1-2 CAN Shield connected to GND
2-3 CAN Shield connected to chassis
JP12 Off CAN Shield not connected
1-2 CAN Shield connected to GND or chassis directly
CAN Shield Capacitor connected to GND or chassis
2-3
through.01 μF capacitor
JP13 Off CAN split termination not connected
1-2 CAN split termination connected to GND
2-3 CAN split termination connected to chassis

Table 2 - Serial PI Card (6300WR) Jumper Locations

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 34 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Group Adjustments

Configuring the
Serial PI Card
(6300WR)
(continued) Elevator JP6 JP5 JP4
Car 1 Off Off Off
Car 2 Off Off On
Car 3 Off On Off
Car 4 Off On On
Car 5 On Off Off
Car 6 On Off On
Car 7 On On Off
Car 8 On On On
Table 3 - Serial PI Card (6300WR) in CAN Communication Mode
(JP7 must be in ON position)

Group Adjustments
1. Access the Group Menu in the UIT: ADJUST Menu->COMMANDS Group.

2. Verify the car-to-car cross connections. See the job wiring diagrams.

3. Remove jumper RCC and RCT (Group CAN termination) on all controller CPUA boards.
Notes:
• Do not remove the jumper from the first and last controller in the group.
• To make the appropriate adjustments according to the job contract, use ADJUST
Menu->ADJUST Car Group Menus (as required).

IMPORTANT! Upon completion of the adjustment phase, download and archive the generic software,
the job image, and upload any software updates. See the Service Information Section.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 35 Printed in USA May, 2010

Group Adjustments TAC32 Controller

This page
intentionally
left blank.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 2 - 36 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Diagnostics

TAC32 Diagnostics

Warning

The following procedures are intended for the

use of qualified and authorized personnel only.
In the interest of your personal safety and the
safety of others, do NOT attempt any procedure
that you are not qualified and authorized to per-
form.
The procedures in this manual must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules
of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code; the latest edition of ASME A17.1; and any
governing local codes.

All drawings and information herein are the proprietary property of ThyssenKrupp Elevator and
are loaned subject to return on demand and must not be made public or copied, nor used,
directly or indirectly, in any manner detrimental to the interest of ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

Every attempt has been made to ensure that this manual is as accurate and up-to-date as pos-
sible. However, ThyssenKrupp Elevator assumes no liability for consequences resulting from
any error or omission. Please report any problems with this manual to the Technical Publica-
tions Department.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-1 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Diagnostics

Introduction

The pages of the TAC32 Controller Diagnostics Procedures are identified as follows:

Introductory Pages: The section number (3), followed by a dash and a sequential capital letter. Example: 3-A.

Installation Section: The section number (3) followed by a dash and a sequential page number. Example: 3-1.

Figures and Tables are identified in sequential order, Table 1, Table 2,...etc.

Revision Bars: Each revised page included in this manual will have a vertical line (change bar) to the left of the text that has been
added or changed. The example at the left of this paragraph shows the size and position of the revision change bar.

Each procedure should be read carefully and completely before starting that procedure. Give special attention to all Cautions and
Warnings; see the Safety Precautions section for details. Follow all procedures in the order written.

All test equipment, supplies, and parts should be on hand prior to starting the Diagnostics Procedures. These should be main-
tained in or near the machine room for future use.

ALL Standard Safety Precautions must be followed on the job site. See the Safety Precautions pertaining to TAC32 equipment.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-2 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Diagnostics

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on elevator equipment. The
procedures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified
elevator personnel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of
others, do not attempt any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.

All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the
equipment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections
are tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and
DIN rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or
intermittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program
Manual and the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment
safety information on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.

Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.

Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-3 Printed in USA May, 2010

Diagnostics TAC32 Controller

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.

Megger or buzzer-type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of

devices such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system per-
formance. Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter
is recommended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program Manual and
the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety informa-
tion on installation and service.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-4 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Diagnostics

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.

Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the
elevator. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are
susceptible to damage by static discharge.

Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper
handling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the
guidelines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti-static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Complete the included board discrepancy sheet.

• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Arrival of Equipment Receiving

Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage. Promptly report all visible damage to the
carrier. All shipping damage claims must be filed with the carrier.

Storing

During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator job site, precautions should be taken to protect
the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture, and temperature extremes.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-5 Printed in USA May, 2010

Diagnostics TAC32 Controller

This page
intentionally
left blank.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-6 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Diagnostics

Contents

Page

Adjustments and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-09

Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-7 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Diagnostics

This page
intentionally
left blank.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-8 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

TAC32 Diagnostics
Adjustments and Commands
Adj. Unit Range Default Definition
AKF — — — This command allows the user to Adjust the Kiosk Floors.
ASI — — — Add Special Inversion - Sets an I/O as inverted in the I/O database.
Format: ASI = name (name of the I/O to invert)
Some I/Os are naturally inverted (SE - Safety Edge).
The software automatically handles the SE signal:
• Active signal if the door is not blocked
• Inactive signal if the door is blocked
For all ThyssenKrupp new sales, the I/Os will already have the correct attributes.
On some modernization jobs, some I/Os may be inverted.
The ASI Command can be used to correct these inverted signals in software.
Example:
Type ASI=SE, click Enter, and the SE input will invert.
BFLH — — — These commands allows the user to set/view the building floor translation table.
BYE — — — This command will logically disconnect IMS so that the car will periodically reload
its adjustments from NV.
C10 sec. 0-900 20 Code Blue Door Hold Time - The time the doors will remain opened at the code
blue designated floor. If, after this time, the Hospital Service switch has not been
activated, the doors will close and the car will return to normal operation.
Note: If the AST timer expires before CBH, the car will return to Automatic Opera-
tion.
C11-C25 cars 0-ncars 1-8 Code Blue Response Priority 1-15 - Use this adjustment to establish priorities for
the cars responding to Code Blue Operation.
C11 is the highest priority car followed by C12, etc.
A zero (0) for this adjustment turns OFF the Code Blue Operation for the car.
C26 — 0-1 0 Code Blue Operation - Set to 1 to enable.
C27 cars 1-15 0 Number of Code Blue Standby Cars.
C28 floor 1-nfloors 1 Code Blue Standby Floor - The car on standby operation will park.
CAT — — — Category - This command displays the names of each of the diagnostics catego-
ries in the elevator system.
Any of the displayed names can be entered on the Remote FAST to display every
adjustment and command associated with that category.
CDIF — — — This command displays the status of the front car door interlock I/O as well as the
current software version.
CDIR — — — This command displays the status of the rear car door interlock I/O as well as the
current software version.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3-9 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

CEF — — — This command will enable and/or disable voice messages.
Values: 0 = Disabled corresponding bit number voice message
1 = Enabled corresponding bit number voice message
Format: CEF=bbbbbbbbbb (b = either a 0 or a 1 for the corresponding bit value).
Bit # Message
0 Phase 1 Main Return
1 Phase 1 Alternate Return
2 Please stand clear of the doors
3 This elevator is on Independent Service
4 This elevator is overloaded
5 This elevator is on Emergency Power Recall
6 This elevator is on Inspection Operation
7 The Seismic Sensor is activated
Please exit car when doors open
8 Medical Emergency - Please exit this elevator
Do not be alarmed
This car is transferring to Emergency Service
9 This elevator is full
Please wait for the next available one
10 This elevator is out of service
11 Going Up or Going Down
Note: Bit 0 is the left most value, and bit 9 is the right most value.
Example: Type CEF=1100011010, and click Enter.
This action will enable these voice messages: Bit 0, Bit 1, Bit 5, Bit 6, and Bit 8.
To enable Bit Message 1 only, type CEF=01 and click Enter.
To enable Bit Message 3 only, type CEF=0001 and click Enter.
CJR — — — This command clears the Jack Resync Statistics.
CNN — — — This command displays CAN errors and number of received messages per chan-
nel.
CNNC — — — This command clears CAN errors.
CPN — — — This command allows the user to set/view the Capture Car PIN Code.
CYC — — — CYC Command
CYC3 Floor#
CYC4 Floor#
Notes:
• Two additional commands to O12 and O13.
• These commands allow car to cycle up to 4 floors when cycle mode is active.
• To clear the CYC3 and CYC4 modes, set O12 or O13 = 0.
D10 — 0-2 2 Limited Door Reversal Type
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Active with EE only
2 = Active with SE or EE
D11 — 0-2 2 Nudging Enable
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Enable with DOB override
Note: The door open button causes the doors to fully reopen during nudging

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 10 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

D12 — 0-8 1 Front Door Type
Values:
0 = No Door
1 = Electronic Door Operator
2 = Discrete Door Operator
3 = Freight Door (freight doors with auto open and auto close)
4 = Freight Manual (freight doors with no auto open, no auto close, no door times,
and no door watchdog protection timer)
5 = Freight Auto Open (freight doors with auto open only, no door watchdog protec-
tion timer)
6 = Freight Auto Close (freight doors with auto close only, and with door watchdog
protection timer)
7 = Electronic Door Operator with CAN serial link
8 = Electronic Door Operator with RS-485 serial link
D13 — 0-8 0 Rear Door Type
Values:
0 = No Door
1 = Electronic Door Operator
2 = Discrete Door Operator
3 = Freight Door (freight doors with auto open and auto close)
4 = Freight Manual (freight doors with no auto open, no auto close, no door times,
and no door watchdog protection timer)
5 = Freight Auto Open (freight doors with auto open only, no door watchdog protec-
tion timer)
6 = Freight Auto Close (freight doors with auto close only, and with door watchdog
protection timer)
7 = Electronic Door Operator with CAN serial link
8 = Electronic Door Operator with RS-485 serial link
D14 0.1 sec 0-100 10 Safety Edge Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay
open after the safety edge is activated.
D15 0.1 sec 4-50 10 Electric Eye Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay
open after the electric eye is activated.
D16 0.1 sec 0-100 10 Door Open Button Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors
will stay open after the door open push button activation.
D17 sec 5-900 10 Door Hold Button Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will
stay open after the door hold push button activation.
D18 0.1 sec 0-40 4 Open High Speed Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time delay after the
doors start the opening cycle with OD and before picking the OHS Relay.
D19 sec 5-120 20 Nudging Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time that the door must be
held open before nudging is activated.
Note: Before this timer will start, the car must have a reason to run.
D20 0.1 sec 0-60 30 Door Reversal Time (optional) - If the electric eye remains active, this adjustment is
the length of time the doors will remain at the door reversal limit (DRL) switch
before fully opening.
Note: To enable this feature, the limited door reversal type must be non-zero.
See Also: D10
D21 0.1 sec 0-1200 200 Front Door Watchdog Time - If the doors do not reach the door close limit before
this timer expires, the system assumes the doors have failed. The doors will be
reopened and another close cycle attempted.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 11 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

D22 0.1 sec 0-1200 200 Rear Door Watchdog Time - If the doors do not reach the door close limit before
this timer expires, the system assumes the doors have failed. The doors will then
be reopened and another close cycle attempted.
D23 0.1 sec 50-300 50 ADA Hall Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay
open when answering hall calls with the ADA option enabled.
D24 0.1 sec 1-300 30 Car Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open
when answering car calls under normal operation.
D25 0.1 sec 1-300 50 Hall Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open
when answering hall calls under normal operation.
D26 — 0-2 0 Door Disconnect -
Values:
0 = The door disconnect feature is de-activated.
1 = The door disconnect feature is active.
2 = Capture the car on door disconnect.
D27 — 0-1 1 ADA - To activate the ADA feature, set to 1.
D28 sec 30-600 300 Stuck Device Time - This adjustment sets the length of time a door opening device
(such as the Door Open Button) must be active before it is recognized as being
stuck.
D29 — 0-1 0 Extended Door Time Enable - To activate this feature, set adjustment D30.
D30 0.1 sec 10-250 30 Extended Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time added to the stan-
dard door time when the car is at the Extended Door Time Landing.
D31 floor 1-nf 1 Extended Door Time Landing -
D32 — 0-4 0 Remote Car Station Door Operation - An I/O-driven feature (not applicable to the
IMS feature of the same name).
Values:
0 = The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call. The doors will
open fully with DOB/DOBR, but will re-close when DOB/DOBR is released.
1 = The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call. The doors will
open fully with DOB/DOBR, and will not re-close until DCB/DCBR is activated.
2 = The doors automatically open upon arrival at a car call and, after a delay, will
close back (similar to door operation on normal automatic operation).
3 = The same operation as value 0 above.
4 = The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call.
• The doors will open with constant pressure on DOB/DOBR, but will re-close if
DOB/DOBR is not maintained until the doors are opened fully.
• The doors will not re-close until DCB/DCBR is activated, but will reopen if DCB/
DCBR is not maintained until the doors are closed fully.
D33 — 0-150 0 Pre-Opening Door Enable -
Values:
0 = Disable pre-opening doors.
1-150 = Requires DZ1 and DZ2; limit speed to 50 FPM.
D34 — 0-1 0 Non-simultaneous Door Enable -
Values:
0 = Disable non-simultaneous doors
1 = Enable non-simultaneous doors
D37 — 0-1 0 Door Hold Open Button Service - This adjustment changes whether or not the car
is taken out of group service when the door hold open button is active.
Values:
0 = The car is not taken out of group service (see DHB).
1 = The car is removed from group service (see DHB).

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 12 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

D38 sec 3-120 8 Sabbath Door Hold Time - The time (in seconds) the doors will hold open at each
floor when the car is operating on Sabbath Operation.
D39 sec 5-120 120 Material Transfer Operation (MTO) Door Time - The door stand-open time when on
MTO.
D40 — 0-1 1 Destination Dispatch ADA Enable - Sets the door close at nudging speed and acti-
vates the nudging audio message -
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
D41 0.1 sec — 150 Hall Door Open Time - Used when a hall call is registered via Floor Mat.
D42 — 0-1 0 Freight Doors Present - Informs the system that the job has freight doors -
0 = No freight doors
1 = Freight doors
DAT — — — Date Adjustment Command - This command will adjust the date on the internal
clock.
Format: DAT= mm/dd/yy
mm - month
dd - day
yy - year
See Also: TIM

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 13 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

DCN — — — DCN Commands and Adjustments
DCNH Help
DCN Display CN stats and channel/port assignments where:
Name = User friendly name of the node stored in the CPU
On = State of CAN communication (Online=1, Offline=0)
RxTot = Total number of frames received
ID = CN address per CN jumpers JP(7,6,5,4)
Ch = Physical channel (2=COP, 3=Hall)
SP = Number of shared ports between cars (Remote I/O Box)
TP = Number of total ports used by this CN
DCNAA node Label Assign a name to a CN
DCNAP node Assign a single port
CNPort
dbPort
DCNAT node Assign the number of total ports, all cars
num Ports
DCNAS node Assign the number of shared ports, all cars (Remote I/O)
num Ports
DCNP node Port Ping a hardware CN I/O port range (0-15)
DCN=node channel numPorts port0 port1. . . = Program CN ports where 99 implies
an unused port.
The Arrangement of CAN CN Boards - To set up the CN boards for this car, see the
chart below.
Notes:
• CNs are used primarily in the car COP (e.g. Channel = 2). For other applica-
tions, like a lobby panel, the CN (per car) can be put on the hall CAN link (e.g.
Channel = 3).
• If jumper JP8 is On, then the node address will also be qualified by matching
the car ID with the CN jumpers JP(3,2,1) where JP(3,2,1) all Off represents car
ID=1.
• This action can be used to uniquely identify a CN address when the same CN
address is used by more than one car on the hall link.
node: 0-7 defines the CN address
See on-board jumpers JP7, JP6, JP5, JP4 where all jumpers removed
implies CN0.
channel: Where 2=>Car, 3=>Hall
numPorts: 0-15 defines the number of ports used by this CN
port0 port1...port15: For each physical CN port used by this CN, list the associ-
ated port in the I/O layout matching the IMS I/O screen
column.
DCNP — — — Ping Node Port -
DES ASCII — Carn Designation - This adjustment sets the group character designation label displayed
Characters on the Car Diagnostic Screen.
Example: DESn=xxx, xxx = ASCII designation
Enter the WRT command, cycle the CPU, and reload from the control panel.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 14 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

DHN — — — Use this command to view and modify configuration of the HN nodes.
Configurations
DHNH - Show help
DHN[M] - Master
Master = 1 - Defines that this car owns the hall riser to teach (see I/O TCH1, TCH2)
Master = 0 - Defines that this car does not own the hall riser and cannot teach.
Used for a car that shares a hoistway with another car, but does not use
TCH1 or TCH2.
shared Car = 0 - No other cars share the riser.
shared Car = 1-8 - The ID of the other car that shares the riser with this car.
DHN[F][R] = Hnid, floor, startport, endport - Modify HN parameters floor and
assigned port (port matches IMS).
DHN[F][R]N = x (x = number of HNs for this car riser - Use to change the number of
HNs used by this riser).
DHN[F][R]P = node, car, port (port is the port physical HN port, range 0-15) - Ping
a hardware HN IO port range.
DHN[F][R] car - Display the HN mappings and status for car riser HN.
DHNF — — — Display HN Nodes Front -
DHNM — — — Master/Slave CAN Command -
DHNR — — — Display HN Nodes Rear -
DKP — — — This command Displays the Keypad Devices.
DKS — — — This command Displays the Kiosk Status.
DLC — — — Data Loc Table Display - This command can be used to display the offset of the
Data Loc Table data from the beginning of the Data Loc Table.
Format: DLCx (x = the tag number of interest).
DRD — — — Data Record Dump - See the TRA Command.
DRS — — — Display Runtime Statistics - This command displays specific information pertaining
to that individual elevator. See RRS and SAM commands.
Mean = Average
SDEV = Deviation off average
Run Time Stats
Sample time: days-h:m:s
MG run time: 000 hours
MG starts: 00000
Miles run: 0000.0
# car runs: 00000
Door cycles: 00000
Door revs: 00000
Door in use: days-h:m:s
Sheave brake cycles: 00000
Sheave brake in use: days-h:m:s
TIMING
Baseline Mean SDEV
Front door close 4.81 0.12
Front door open 3.56 0.00
One floor run 5.81 0.50
DSCR* — — — Deselect All Floors - This command will deselect all floors.
DSCS — — — Destination ADA Calls.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 15 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

DSCS* — — — Set All Floors - This command will set all floors.
DSF — — — IMS Secured Floors - This command displays all IMS floor lockouts and overrides.
Note: To reset all IMS floor lockouts and overrides, use the DSFC command.
DSFC — — — IMS Secured Floors Clear - This command clears all IMS floor lockouts and
overrides.
Note: To display all IMS floor lockouts and overrides, use the DSF adjustment.
DSI — — — Deletes Special I/O Inversion - This command removes an I/O from the special
inversion list. See ASI for a description.
Format: DSI=name (name = The name of the I/O to remove from the special inver-
sion list).
See Also: PSI and ASI
DSL — — — Display Stabilized Leveling Distance - Use this command:
• As an aid to setting an optimized slowdown distance.
• To determine how far the car ran at leveling speed on the last Up or Down run.
DSO — — — Display Scheduler Overruns - This command displays the number of processor
overruns logged for each of the 16 software time intervals.
DSV — — — Enable / Disable Daylight Savings Time (DST) - This command enables and dis-
ables the ability of the clock to automatically adjust for DST.
Values:
>0 = Automatic adjusting of DST is enabled.
0 = Automatic adjusting of DST is disabled (default setting of the clock chip).
E10 — 0-2 0 Emergency Power Type
Values:
0 = None
1 = Type-0 (battery lowering)
2 = Type-4 (alternate power source)
Note: The system must be re-started before changes take effect.
E11 floor 1-nf 1 Emergency Power Return Floor - During an Emergency Power return phase, this
adjustment sets which floor the car will attempt a return to.
E12 F/R 0-1f 0 Emergency Power Door - For use with selective doors, this adjusts which door will
open at the return floor (when returning to landing).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
E13 sec. 10-300 300 Emergency Power Manual Select Time - When in manual select mode, this adjusts
the time delay before the car is actually selected (Type-4 only).
E14 — 0-1 0 Okay To Hold Doors Open on Emergency Power -
Values:
0 = False
1 = True
E15 fpm/sec 0-300 0 Emergency Power Acceleration/Deceleration Rate Limit - Used to limit power con-
sumption from the Emergency Power Supply by allowing lower accel/decel rates
during Emergency Power Operation.
Note: Set to Zero to force the use of normal S-curve rates.
E16 fpm 20- 0 Emergency Power Top Speed Limit - Used to limit power consumption from the
20000 Emergency Power Supply by allowing lower top speed during Emergency Power.
Note: Set to Zero to force the use of normal S-curve rates.
E17 floors 1-nfloors 1 Emergency Power Return Floor - This is the designated floor position number for
the Emergency Power Recall Floor.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 16 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

E18 cars 1-ncars 1 Maximum Elevators on Emergency Power - This is the maximum number of cars
allowed to run simultaneously on Emergency Power Operation.
E19 min. 2-10 2 Emergency Power Extended Lowering Time - Use this adjustment to set the time
allowed for cars to arrive at the emergency power floor.
E20-E34 ncars 0-ncars 1-15 Emergency Power Lowering - This adjustment sets the automatic lowering
sequence for Emergency Power Operation.
Note: E20 would be the first elevator to lower, and E34 would be the last elevator to
lower.
E35-E49 ncars 0-ncars 1-15 Emergency Power Run - This adjustment sets the automatic select to run sequence
for Emergency Power Operation.
Note: E35 would be the first elevator to run, and E49 would be the last elevator to
run.
E50 sec. 0-60 Job Emergency Power Lower Timer - This adjustment sets the time for each group in
EPROM the lowering sequence.
Note: If the groups are powered up simultaneously, the previous group has suffi-
cient time to initialize and begin to lower.
E51 sec. 0-100 Job Emergency Power Auto Select Timer - If the groups are powered up on Emergency
EPROM Power simultaneously, this adjustment sets the time for each group in the lowering
sequence to initialize and begin lowering.
E52 — 0-1 0 Group Level Emergency Power -
• Set to 1 = Enable
• Set to 0 = Enable Intergroup Emergency Power using a CGA Card.
EID — — — A command to enter or display an elevator ID number for a field contract (for use
with remote monitoring).
Examples:
To display the field contract number, type EID and press Enter.
To change the number, type EID=12345678 and press Enter.
ELD ASCII — Car No. Elevator Designator Display and Adjustment - To display the three character ASCII
Character designator for this car, type ELD and press Enter.
Example: ELD=xxx
This action changes the car designator to xxx (the three new ASCII char. chosen).
EPN — — — This command allows the user to set/view the Express Operation PIN Code.
ERC — — — This command displays and then clears the Encoder Recalibration Statistics.
See also: P20
F10 floor 1-nf 1 Main Fire Landing - This is the floor position number that is designated as the Main
Fire Recall Floor. This should be set for the same floor where the Fire Phase 1 key
switch is located.
F11 floor 1-nf 2 Fire Alt Landing - The floor position number that is designated as the Alternate Fire
Recall Floor.
F12 F/R 0-1 0 Main Fire Landing Door - When in response to Phase 1 Fire Service, this adjusts
which door opens at the Main Fire Landing.
Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door
F13 F/R 0-1 0 Fire Alt Landing Door - When in response to Phase 1 Fire Service, this adjusts
which door opens at the Alternate Fire Landing.
Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 17 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

F14 sec 0-60 30 Fire Override Time - This is the time delay that must expire before Phase 1 Fire Ser-
vice is allowed to override attendant operated features such as Independent Ser-
vice.
Note: This feature is not allowed to operate on some Fire Service types.
F15 — 0-2 — Fire Service Switch Type - Set this type of switch for a Secondary Phase 1 Fire Ser-
vice switch. The value to be entered must be dictated by the Fire Service type (F16)
and the provided hardware.
Values:
0 = No Secondary Switch
1 = Two Position Secondary Switch
2 = Three Position Secondary Switch
F16 — 0-20 — Fire Service Type - This selection determines which type of Phase 1 and Phase 2
Fire Service Operation will be provided.
Values:
0 = No Fire Service
1 = ANSI/ASME 1993
2 = Chicago Building Code
3 = California
4 = York City RS18
5 = Massachusetts 98
6 = ANSI/ASME 1988
7 = Houston 98
8 = Michigan 98, Detroit
9 = B44
10 = White Plains NY
11 = ANSI/ASME 2000, South Carolina 2000, Mass. 2000, Michigan 2000
12 = B44 2000
13 = ANSI/ASME 2004, South Carolina 2004, Mass. 2004, Michigan 2004
14 = B44 2004
15 = Korea
16 = ANSI 2005
17 = B44 2005
18 = EN81 2005
19 = ANSI 2007
20 = B44 2007
F17 sec 0-255 100 Hall Fire Door Open Time - This adjustment sets the value of the Phase 1 door
open time for special (Houston) Fire Service.
Notes:
• Cars recalled to the fire floor on Phase 1, with corresponding doors held open,
will close the doors after this time delay.
• Additional door open push button (input FSDO) per car is required in the hall for
this operation so that the doors may be reopened on demand by fire personnel.
F18 — 1-3 3 Phase 1 Safety Edge Operation - This adjustment determines how the safety edge
and door operation interact during Fire Service Phase 1 Operation. This adjustment
must be coordinated with applicable Fire Codes.
Values:
1 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at reduced door speed during
Phase 1 Fire Service.
2 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 1 Fire Service.
3 = The safety edge is active, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 1 Fire Service.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 18 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

F19 — 1-3 3 Phase 2 Safety Edge Operation - This adjustment determines how the safety edge
and door operation interact during Fire Service Phase 2 Operation. This adjustment
must be coordinated with applicable Fire Codes.
Values:
1 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at reduced door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
2 = The safety edge is inactive, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
3 = The safety edge is active, and the doors close at normal door speed during
Phase 2 Fire Service.
F20 — 0-1 0 Fire Lift - Use this adjustment to designate an elevator as a Fire Lift.
Note: This adjustment only applies to fire service types that require the designation
of Fire Lifts.
Values:
0 = The elevator is not designated as a Fire Lift
1 = The elevator is designated as a Fire Lift
F21 — 0-1 1 B44 Phase 2 Activation Location - Only use this adjustment for B44 Fire Service
Operation.
Note: This adjustment will determine whether Phase 2 Operation is allowed to acti-
vate/deactivate only at the main return landing, or activate/deactivate at the main
or alternate return landing.
Values:
0 = Phase 2 can activate only at the main return landing.
1= Phase 2 can activate/deactivate at the main or the alternate return landing.
F22 — 0-1 0 Phase 2 Reduced Speed Enabled - This adjustment sets whether the car will run at
a reduced speed on Phase 2.
Values:
0 = Off
1 = On
See Also: M26
F23 — 0-1 0 This adjustment will set the 1998 B44 Fire Service, Phase 2 return door speed.
Note: If F23=1, the door closes in response to the initial Phase 2 recall activation
done at nudging speed. This action occurs without regard to adjustment F19 (used
to set up the safety edge operation and the door closing speed during Phase 2).
Values:
0 = The doors close at a speed determined by the F19 adjustment.
1 = The doors close at nudging speed.
F24 — 0-1 0 This adjustment will set the 2000 Fire Service (A17 and B44) Phase 2 recall floor.
Values:
0 = Phase 2 recall will take the car to the main fire floor.
1 = Phase 2 recall will take the car to the current active fire floor.
F25 — 0-1 0 This adjustment will set the Fire Service Return Indicator (Fire Hat).
Note: The F25 setting has no effect on the 2004 Fire Service. The Fire Hat light will
remain active while either Phase 1 or Phase 2 is active.
Values:
0 = The Fire Hat light is active during Phase 1 Recall and, where applicable, during
Phase 2 Recall. The light will deactivate when the car arrives at the fire floor.
1 = The Fire Hat light will remain active while Phase 1 or Phase 2 is active.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 19 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

F26 — 0-4 0 This adjustment will set variations of Smoke Sensor Operation for Standard 2000
Fire Service (A17 and B44).
Values:
0 = The Standard 2000 (A17 and B44) fire service sensor operation is active.
1 = The Maryland variation of 2000 fire service is active. Maryland allows the active
recall floor to be changed from the main landing to the alternate landing if the
main landing sensor is active, the secondary switch (if provided) is in the OFF
position, and the primary switch is moved to the RESET position and then to
the OFF position. See Group CS2 bit 4.
2 = The Ohio variation of 2000 fire service is active. Ohio allows the alternate land-
ing recall on Phase 1 to be overridden: place either the primary or secondary
switch in the ON position and the car will move to the main landing. The car
will revert to the alternate landing recall if the primary switch and the second-
ary switch (if provided) are in the OFF position and the main landing sensor is
still active. See Group CS2 bit 5.
3 = The Massachusetts variation of 2000 fire service is active. Massachusetts
allows the alternate landing recall on Phase 1 to be overridden: place the pri-
mary switch in the ON position and the secondary switch will be ignored if the
main landing sensor is active. See Group CS2 bit 6.
4 = The Manchester, NH variation of 2000 fire service is active. Manchester allows
fire service initiated by sensors to be deactivated: reset all sensors and no
required switch change is needed. See Group CS2 bit 7.
F27 — 0-55 0 Phase 1 Fire Service Door Profile -This adjustment sets the door profile for use with
(HEX) Phase 1.
Format:
Tens place = Rear door profile (0 through door profile range)
Units place = Front door profile (0 through door profile range)
Note: Before use, selected door profile must be adjusted in the correct door opera-
tor.
Range:
Valid door profile numbers depend upon the type of door board, controller, and
door operator.
CAN doors = 5 profile capability
Linear doors = 2 profile capability
See also: The SDP command and the door adjustment manual.
Examples:
1. Set F27 = 0 Sets the door profile used for Phase 1 Fire Service to the same
adjustments that are used for each individual floor when not on Phase 1.
2. Set F27 = 20 Sets the rear door to use profile 2 for Phase 1 Fire Service
(regardless of the elevator floor location). The front door will use the same
door profile adjustments that are used for each individual floor when not on
Phase 1 (regardless of the elevator floor location).
3. Set F27 = 02 Sets the rear door to use the same door profile adjustments
that are used for each individual floor when not on Phase 1 (regardless of
which floor the elevator is located). The front door will use profile 2 for Phase 1
Fire Service (regardless of the elevator floor location).
4. Set F27 = 53 Sets the in-use door profile (while on Phase 1 Fire Service) to
profile 5 for the rear door, and profile 3 for the front door (regardless of the
elevator floor location).

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 20 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

F28 — 0-1 0 Phase 1 Fire Service Door Edge Control - Phase 1 Fire Recall during battery lower-
ing operation or low oil operation (A17 Code 2000 and later). This adjustment is
offered for locations (such as Maryland) that require further refinement to this recall
operation.
A car recalling under these circumstances is expected to recall to the appropriate
floor, open automatic doors, close them within 15 seconds, and leave the doors
open PB active.
Values:
0 = Operation occurs as described above.
1 = Operation occurs as described above.
• The electronic door edge is ignored (F18) and the doors close at reduced speed.
• Other door opening devices (electric eyes or door hold button/switch) are disre-
garded.
• Bypass of the in-stop switch continues as if the car operation is on Phase 1
Recall.
F30 sec — 0 Hall Fire Door Time For Pressurized Hoistway -
F31 floor 1-nfloors 1 Fire Recall Landing - This adjustment sets the designated floor position number for
the Main Fire Recall Floor.
Note: This should be set to the floor location of the Phase 1 Fire Service key switch.
F32 floors 1-nfloors 2 Fire Alternate Floor - This is the designated floor position number for the Alternate
Fire Landing.
FCP — — — Floor Count Position Display and Adjustment Command - This command displays
the encoder position count for each floor.
Note: Value 10000 is the bottom edge of the at-floor-level zone for the bottom
landing (on slowdown vane selector, these values are ignored and will be zero).
Examples:
1. To display the encoder position count for Floor #n, where n is 1 for the bottom
floor, type FCPn and press Enter.
2. To set the encoder position count for Floor #n to the specified value (the new
value must be within the At-Floor-Level Zone for Floor #n), type FCPn=value
and press Enter.
FIS — — — Field Contract # IMS Remote Monitoring
• To see the field contract number, type FIS and press Enter.
• To change the number, type FIS = 12345678 press Enter.
FJR — — — Force Jack Resync - This command signals an immediate request for a jack resync
operation.
FLT — — — Fault Buffer Display - This command displays the contents of the fault buffer. The
fault buffer contains a record of the previous 24 faults that have occurred, along
with the number of occurrences of that fault.
Format: FLT[n]n = The fault number to display (plus the next three faults).
• To display all 24 faults, type FLT and press Enter.
• To display faults starting with fault number n type FLTn, and press Enter.
Note: See also FLTN
FLTN — — — Fault Non-volatile - This command displays additional fault information relating to
car position, speed, direction, and service type for most recent faults. The FLTN
information is retained on a power cycle.
To display the most recent 5 faults, type FLTN and press Enter.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 21 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

FOP — — — Front Openings Display and Adjustment - This command displays the front open-
ings served by this car.
Format: FOP[S/C][n]
S = Set
C = Clear
n = Floor number
Examples:
• To display the front openings served by this car, type FOP and press Enter.
• To set Floor #n to be a valid front opening, where n starts at 1 for the bottom
floor, type FOPSn and press Enter.
• To clear Floor #n so that it is no longer a valid front opening, type FOPCn and
press Enter.
See Also: ROP
FSB — — — Sabbath Operation Front Floors Served - Field selectable as to which front open-
ings are served while on Sabbath Operation.
FTD — — — FTDn - This command displays detailed information about fault number n (n must
be 0 - 4). The information displayed is a snapshot at the time of the fault.
G10 trips 1-60 12 Up-Peak Load Count - This adjustment sets the number of trips from the lobby in a
three-minute time interval with the car loaded (which triggers Up-peak Operations).
Loaded car indicators:
• A discrete load switch input
• An electronic loadweigher trip point activation
• The car leaves the lobby with more than 2 car calls registered
G11 sec 10-255 60 Up-Peak Duration Time - The minimum duration of Up-Peak after being triggered.
G12 1/16 sec. 10-960 660 Up-Peak Dispatch Penalty Time - Use this adjustment to set the penalty time added
to the car ETA time.
Note: The group will assign hall calls to other cars before it assigns them to the car
at the lobby.
G13 1/16 sec. 10-960 800 Down-Peak Trigger Time - Down Peak Operation is activated when the average
down hall call ETA exceeds the trigger time value.
G14 2 sec. 10-255 90 Down-Peak Duration Time - The minimum duration of down peak after down peak
demand is no longer present.
G15 sec. 3-30 8 Next-up Door Hold Time - The time the doors are held open on Next-Up Operation
(if another car is waiting).
Notes:
• The time is reduced to zero (0) if the 50% loadweigher is activated, or if more
than NCO / G22 car calls are registered.
• This timer is added into the ETA calculation for this car.
G16 cars 0-ncars 1 The number of Next-Up cars when not on Up-Peak Operation.
G17 cars 0-ncars 1 The number of Next-Up cars when on Up-Peak Operation.
G19 cars 0-ncars 1 Hold Cars During Up-Peak - The number of hold cars when on Up-Peak Operation.
G20 1/16 sec. 0-960 48 Hold Car Penalty Time - The amount of time added to the hold car ETA bid time.
G21 sec. 0-60 30 Hold Car Time - The time interval that the car remains at the lobby on Hold Car
Operation.
G22 calls 0-20 3 Next-Up Car Call Override - If the number of car calls exceeds the NCO value, the
car is removed from Next-Up Operation and allowed to service car calls.
G23 — 0-1 0 Hall Call Dispatching Algorithm Type -
Values:
0 = ETD
1 = ETA

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 22 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

G24 — — — Re-open Door Avoidance - Doors do not re-open for a hall call after they have
reached DOL.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Prevent if doors are standing and timing out on the DOL
2 = Prevent if doors are closing
G25 — 0-1 1 Emergency Dispatch - Set to 1 to enable.
G26 sec. — 60 Emergency Dispatching Interval Time -
G27 load % 100 Maximum Load Percentage - The dispatcher considers that the car is full.
G28 — 0-2 0 Reverse Traffic Avoidance -
0 = Reversal allowed
1 = Reversal allowed but avoided when possible
2 = Reversal not allowed
G29 — 0-1 0 Enable ADA Nearest Car Selection -
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G30 sec 0-60 2 Reassignment Hall Call Penalty - Minimum gain ETA/ETD threshold that must be
obtained for a car to have a call re-assigned to it.
G31 1/10 sec. 0-3000 10 Dispatching Cost Comparison Threshold -
G32 sec. 0-20 10 Coincident Car Call Penalty Time - If carn has a coincident car call at a floor with a
hall call, and if the ETA for carn is less than the ETA of the best car, carn will get the
call.
G33 floor 0-nfloors 0 Transfer Floor 1 - This adjustment sets which floor is designated as Transfer Floor 1
(which will only accept Down hall calls). A zero (0) will disable the transfer floor
operation.
Notes:
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is activated, and the car is below the transfer
floor, the car call for the transfer floor cannot be registered.
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is not active, or if the car is above the transfer
floor, the car call for the transfer floor can be registered.
G34 floor 0-nfloors 0 Transfer Floor 2 - This adjustments sets the floor designated as the transfer floor
(which accepts only Down hall calls). A zero (0) value will disable the Transfer Floor
Operation.
Notes:
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is activated, and the car is below the transfer
floor, the car call for the transfer floor cannot be registered.
• If the Transfer Floor Operation is not active, or if the car is above the transfer
floor, the car call for the transfer floor can be registered.
G35 sec. 0-600 180 Long-Wait Call Threshold - One long-wait down call will trigger Down Peak Zoning
to the low zone (if the time threshold is above this adjustment).
• The time threshold will also trigger for a shorter threshold of two long-wait calls,
or a threshold of three long-wait calls.
• If this adjustment value is too large, lower floor service suffers.
• If this adjustment value is too small, upper floor service suffers.
Note: If Down Peak Operation is being triggered by an average down call wait
threshold, then this adjustment should be set greater than that threshold.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 23 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

G36 cars 1-15 1 Down Peak Zoning Operation–Maximum Number of Cars on Simultaneous Low
Zone Operation - This adjustment limits the number of cars that may be simultane-
ously dispatched to the lower portion of the hoistway.
• This adjustment should be typically set to 1 for smaller groups, or 2 for groups
of six or more cars.
• If this adjustment value is too small, lower floor service suffers.
• If this adjustment value is too large, upper floor service suffers.
To disable, set to zero (0).
G37 floors nfloors 4 Minimum Number of Floors in Low Zone - This adjustment enforces a minimum
number of floors contained in the low zone, and should be set according to the
number of floors that will typically almost fill up a car before it returns to the lobby.
Note: It is generally undesirable to dispatch a car from the lobby to serve only two
or three calls before returning to the lobby.
GET — — — GET Parameters - This command retrieves the saved parameters from the EEPROM
and moves them into RAM.
Notes:
• The CPU only works with parameter values that are stored in its RAM memory.
• To display a parameter that caused an out of range error, type GET and press
Enter.
• To eliminate a parameter error, enter a value in the appropriate range, save with
the WRT command, and recall with the GET command.
GIC — — — Group Inconspicuous Calls - This command allows a car with Inconspicuous Riser
operation to service landings that do not contain Inconspicuous Riser hall calls.
Note: This command will not prevent car call registration to any opening which also
has a corresponding Inconspicuous Riser hall call.
Format: GIC[R][S/U][n]
R = Rear
S = Served
U = Unserved
n = Floor Number (or * for all floors)
Examples:
1. To allow a car on Inconspicuous Riser to register a rear car call to Landing 3
(even if it does not contain an Inconspicuous Riser hall call at that opening),
type GICRS3 and press Enter.
2. To only allow a car on Inconspicuous Riser to register a front car call to
Landing 3 (if there is an Inconspicuous Riser hall call at that opening), type
GICU3 and press Enter.
3. To reset this adjustment so that a car on Inconspicuous Riser can only register
a front car call to a landing (if there is an Inconspicuous Riser hall call at that
opening), type GICU* and press Enter.
4. To display the list of all front car calls that can be served while on
Inconspicuous Riser, type GIC and press Enter.
5. To display the list of all rear car calls that can be served while on
Inconspicuous Riser, type GICR and press Enter.
GPN — — — This command displays which node the car is communicating to (for group func-
tions).

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 24 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

GSC — — — Group Served Calls - This command allows a car with Inconspicuous Riser opera-
tion to not serve all landings when not on Inconspicuous Riser operation.
This list will contain the landings that can be served while not on Inconspicuous
Riser operation, and is defaulted to all valid landings for the specific side (front or
rear).
To activate this adjustment, enable R24.
Format: GSC[R][S/U][n]
R = Rear
S = Served
U = Unserved
n = Floor Number (or * for all floors)
Examples:
1. To allow the rear car call to be registered for floor 3 while the car is on group
service, type GSCRS3 and press Enter.
2. To prevent the front car call for the 3rd Landing from being able to be
registered while the car is on group service, type GSCU3 and press Enter.
3. To prevent all front car calls from being registered while on group service, type
GSCU* and press Enter.
4. To display the list of landings that will be allowed group service status for front
doors while not on Inconspicuous Riser Operation, type GSC and press Enter.
H10 floor 1-nf 1 Homing Return Landing 1 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to
during car homing operation. To activate, use Input 1.
H11 F/R 0-1 0 Homing Return Door 1 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return
floor 1 (when the landing has selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H12 floor 1-nf 2 Homing Return Landing 2 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to
during car homing operation. To activate, use Input 2.
H13 F/R 0-1 0 Homing Return Door 2 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return
floor 2 (when the landing has selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H14 floor 1-nf 3 Homing Return Landing 3 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to
during car homing operation. To activate, use Input 3.
H15 F/R 0-1 0 Homing Return Door 3 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return
floor 3 (when the landing has selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H16 0.1 sec 0-600 150 Homing Door Time - This adjustment sets the door time used when at the return
landing (during car homing operation).
H17 floor 1-nfloors 1 Flooded Pit Sensor 1 Operation Return Floor - The floor that the car goes to if the
pit is flooded, sensor input FPS1.
H18 F/R 0-1 0 Flooded Pit Sensor 1 Operation Return Door - The side of doors that cycle upon
arrival at the return floor during Flooded Pit Operation, sensor input FPS1 -
0 = Front
1 = Rear

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 25 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

H19 floor 1-nfloors 1 Flooded Pit Sensor 2 Operation Return Floor - The floor that the car goes to if the
pit is flooded, sensor input FPS2.
H20 F/R 0-1 0 Flooded Pit Sensor 2 Operation Return Door - The side of doors that cycle upon
arrival at the return floor during Flooded Pit Operation, sensor input FPS2 -
0 = Front
1 = Rear
H21 sec 0-30 15 Flooded Pit Door Open Time - This adjustment sets the door standing time used at
the return floor.
HIF floor 1-nf 1 Hall Independent Floor - The floor number that the car goes to when the hall inde-
pendent switch is operated. See CS3 bit 13.
I10 — 0-1 0 Event Inhibit During Inspection - This adjustment inhibits IMS event logging while
the car is on Inspection Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not inhibit event logging during Inspection Operation.
1 = Inhibit event logging during Inspection Operation.
I11 — 0-1 0 Event Office Single - This adjustment reports office events to only one of the speci-
fied phone numbers for IMS Office Events.
Values:
0 = Do not report events to only one phone number.
1 = Report events to only one phone number.
I12 — 0-1 0 Event Office Single - This adjustment reports owner events to only one of the spec-
ified phone numbers for IMS Owner Events.
Values:
0 = Do not report events to only one phone number.
1 = Report events to only one phone number.
I13 — 0-1 1 Remote Monitor Aux - This adjustment enables the controller to report all Aux
Events.
Note: Ensure that the Event Monitoring is also set up through IMS.
Values:
0 = Do not report events
1 = Report events
Event Monitoring List
• Service Count
• Monthly Service
• Long Level Time (also AVG)
• Low Oil
• Stuck Car #1 (no DZ and no Safe String)
• Stuck Car #2 (no DZ and no Gate/Interlock open)
• Independent Service
• Car Stop Switch
• Reopen Device Failure
• Door Watchdog
• Excessive Relevels
I14 count 3-30 20 Relevel Service Count - This adjustment sets the number of relevels allowed in a
five minute period before flagging an Excessive Relevel Event.
I15 0.1 sec 0-255 150 Long Level Time - This adjustment sets the maximum amount of time the car can
level before reporting a Long Level Event.
I16 sec 1-600 5 Stuck Car #1 Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before reporting when the
car is out of the door zone and the safety string is open.
I17 sec 1-600 5 Stuck Car #2 Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before reporting when the
car is out of the door zone and the gate or interlock is open.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 26 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

I18 sec 1-1800 600 Car Stop Switch Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time that the stop
switch can be activated before reporting an event.
I19 sec 1-1800 900 Independent Service Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time that the car
can be on Independent Service before reporting an event.
I21 days 1-365 7 Event Am Alive - This adjustment sets the number of days between the elevator call
to the Vista Center to report that it is running (when remote monitoring is active).
IRL — — — Inconspicuous Riser Lockouts - This command displays landings that are being
locked out by the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
J10 pounds 500 - 2500 Capacity - The rated car capacity.
65000
J11 — 1 -# of 1 Car ID - The car number within a group, beginning with 1.
cars
J12 — 0-240 0 Car Comm Number
Values:
0 = The controller computes the comm number from the car and group number.
1-255 = Force to that special comm number.
J13 — 1-8 1 Group ID - The group number within a multiple group network, beginning with 1.
J14 floor 1-nf 1 Lobby Floor - This adjustment sets the lobby to the proper car opening (beginning
with 1 = bottom floor).
Note: This floor number cannot be the building floor number.
J15 floor 2-nf 2 Number of Floors - The number of floors for this specific car.
Note: This number may differ from other cars in the group.
J16 ports 1-34 34 Number of I/O Ports - The number of I/O ports on the main board and all expansion
boards, with each port having 8 signals.
Note: This value does not count the number of LON ports.
J17 ports 0-243 0 Number of LON Channel 1 Ports - The number of LON Channel 1 ports for this car,
with each port having 8 signals.
J18 ports 0-243 0 Number of LON Channel 2 Ports - The number of LON Channel 2 ports for this car,
with each port having 8 signals.
J19 — 0-1 0 Relevel on the Stop Switch -
Values:
0 = No releveling while the Emergency Stop Switch is thrown.
1 = Up releveling only while Emergency Stop Switch is thrown.
J20 — 0-1 0 Stop Switch Type - This adjustment sets the value to the type of stop switch pro-
vided on this installation.
Values:
0 = Keyed stop switch.
1 = Public access stop switch.
J21 — 0-1 0 Force HN CAN Polling - Set this adjustment to force the car to poll the HN network -
even when not running as the group.
Notes:
• Normally, only the car running the group will do the polling.
• Use only when no group is running that can also poll the CAN HN network.
Example: Group overlay without the CAN interface.
Values:
0 = Do not force HN polling
1 = Force HN polling by this car
J22 — — — This command will turn on the unique HN Can ID's sent from each car.
Note: Requires HN version 25 or greater.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 27 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

J23 — 1-9 Job Controller Type - Defines the type of controller.
EEPROM
J24 floors 0-128 Job Number of Total Floors in Group -
EEPROM
J25 cars 1-15 Job Number of Cars in Group -
EEPROM
JBD — — — Job Information Display Command - This command displays the following data:
• Distributor number
• Distributor name
• Job number
• Job name
• Job date
• Software version number of the job
JRT — — — Jack Resync Time - This command sets the time of day that a jack resync will
occur.
Note: All fields are required, including the colons (:).
Format: JRT=[hh:mm:ss] [a/p]
hh = hours
mm = minutes
ss = seconds
a = AM
p = PM
K10 — 0-1 1 Block Car Calls at Floors with Destination Dispatch Kiosks - Set to 1 to enable.
K11 — 0-1 1 Cancel Destination Calls if no passenger is detected (anti-nuisance feature) - Set to
1 to enable.
K12 — 0-1 1 Kiosk Operation Mode -
Values:
0 = Hall Calls
1 = Destination Calls
K13 floors 1-nfloors 1 Express Operation FROM Floor - Sets the default floor for Express Operation when
activated by a Destination Dispatch Kiosk.
K14 floors 1-nfloors Top Express Operation TO Floor - Sets the default floor for Express Operation when
activated by a Destination Dispatch Kiosk.
K15 F/R 0-1 0 Express Operation FROM Side - Sets the default side of the doors to cycle during
Express Operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
K16 F/R 0-1 0 Express Operation TO Side - Sets the default side of the doors to cycle during
Express Operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
K17 cars 1-15 1 Number of Express Cars - Sets the number of elevators that will express cycle
between given floors during Express Operation.
K18 sec — 180 Express Operation Timeout - Sets the time duration of Express Operation.
K19 sec — 180 Capture Operation Timeout - Sets the time duration of Capture Operation.
K20 sec — 180 Service Operation Timeout - Sets the time duration of Service Operation.
K21 cars 1-15 1 Main Service Car - Sets the Main Service Car.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 28 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

K22 cars 1-15 2 Alternate Service Car - Sets the Alternate Service Car.
K23 sec. 1-10 5 Kiosk Heartbeat Time - Used for large installations with custom arrangements.
L10 cars 0-ncars 1 Lobby Elevator Request - This is the number of cars requested to park at the lobby.
To disable, set to zero (0).
L11 cars 0-ncars 1 Alternate Lobby Request - The number of cars required to park at the alternate
lobby.
Note: To activate, the CSW bit 9 must be set.
L12 floors 1-nfloors 1 Lobby - This adjustment sets the designated floor position number for the lobby
floor, and is also used as the homing floor for the lobby elevator request.
L13 floors 1-nfloors 2 Alternate Lobby Floor - The floor that is designated as the alternate lobby floor.
Note: To activate, the CSW bit 9 must be set.
L14 floors 1-nfloors 1 Zone 1 Floor - The car stays at the last floor served for normal operation.
Notes:
• When parking is enabled and a car becomes free, it will be sent to one of the
zone floors (after a time delay - L25).
• ZN1 through ZN6 allow for six different zone or parking floors.
• The number of zone floors used is set by L20.
L15 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 2 Floor - See L14.
L16 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 3 Floor - See L14.
L17 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 4 Floor - See L14.
L18 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 5 Floor - See L14.
L19 floors 1-nfloors 2 Zone 6 Floor - See L14.
L20 zones 0-6 0 Number of Zones - The maximum number of zones or parking floors in the group.
Notes:
• If this number is set larger than the number of cars, the parking floors (or zone
floors) will be rotated on each assignment.
• This parameter is usually set to a value less than the total number of cars.
See Also: ZN1, CSW Bits 4 and 5.
L21 floor 1-nfloor 2 Dual Lobby Floor - The floor position number designated as the Dual Lobby Land-
ing.
L22 cars 1-ncars 1 Dual Lobby Request - The number of cars required to park at the Dual Lobby Floor.
L23 floor 1-nfloor 2 Rear Lobby Floor - See L12 and CSW Bit 11.
L24 cars 0-ncars 1 Rear Lobby Car Request - See L10 and CSW Bit 11.
L25 2 sec. 0-60 8 Park Free Time - The adjustment sets the amount of time the car must be free in
order to zone.
See Also: L14.
M09 — — 0 Rope Slip Factor -
M10 — 1-5 0 Motor Starter Type -
Values:
1 = Across Line - One Contactor
2 = Across Line -Two Contactor
3 = Delta One Contactor
4 = Wye-Delta -Two Contactor
5 = Electronic
M11 0.1 sec 1-20 0 Motor Starter Time - Wye-Delta interval timer value.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 29 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

M12 — 1-6 0 Valve Type - This adjustment sets the active solenoids during a high speed Up or
Down run.
Values:
1 = Up fast only, Down fast, and Down slow
2 = Up fast only, and Down fast only
3 = Up fast and Up slow, Down fast only
4 = Up fast and Up slow, Down fast and Down slow
5 = Dump valve, Down fast, and Down slow
6 = Dump valve, and Down fast only
M13 0.1 sec 1-6000 30 Restart Delay - This adjustment sets the amount of delay time from the end of one
run until the beginning of a new run (relevel runs do not count).
M14 0.1 sec 1-30 5 Motor Stop Time (previous label, TMS Timer) - This adjustment sets the time delay
between the Up-valve deactivation and the motor deactivation.
NET — — — Ethernet Configuration -
NET Display current Ethernet configuration
NETI=xxx.yyy.zzz.aaa //set IP address (ex. 192.168.0.11), NETC must equal 1
NETN=xxx.yyy.zzz.aaa //set Mask (ex. 255.255.255.0), NETC must equal 1
NETC={0,1,2} Note: When NETC=0, the IP Address is set
to192.168.0.gc, where g is the group# and c is the
car#.
Example: Group1, Car1 = 192.168.0.17 (0x11)
0 =Autoset Static IP
1 =Userset Static IP
2 =DHCP Enabled
NETD Disable ethernet stats collection
NETE Enable ethernet stats collection
NETS Display ethernet stats collection
NETC — — — NETC={0,1,2}
Values:
0 - Autoset Static IP
1 - Userset Static IP
2 - DHCP Enabled
Note: When NETC=0, the IP Address is set to
192.168.0.gc, where g is group# and c is car#.
Example: Group1,Car1 = 192.168.0.17 (0x11)
NETD — — — Disable the Ethernet Stats Collection -
NETE — — — Enable the Ethernet Stats Collection -.
NETI — — — Set the IP address (ex. 192.168.0.11), NETC must equal 1.
NETI=xxx.yyy.zzz.aaa
NETN — — — Set the Mask (ex. 255.255.255.0), NETC must equal 1.
NETN=xxx.yyy.zzz.aaa
NETS — — — Display Ethernet Stats -
NVS — — — Non-Volatile Memory Status - This command displays a table of information about
each of the non-volatile memory segments.
Table Information
• The TAG number.
• The number of failures.
• The number of times non-volatile memory was busy when the first attempt to
write to the memory occurred.
• The number of times the information was rejected.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 30 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

O10 calls 0-nf 3 Anti-nuisance Car Calls - This adjustment sets the number of car calls answered
(without passenger detection) before activating the anti-nuisance operation.
O11 inches 0-168 60 Hoistway Access Bottom Zone - When the car runs on hoistway access, this zone is
the distance (in inches) above the bottom hoistway access floor.
See Also: O21 and O22
O12 floor 0-nf 0 Car Cycle Floor 1 - This adjusts the car cycle for floor 1, and the car will cycle
between floors 1 and 2. To deactivate this feature, set either O12 or O13 to 0
(zero).
O13 floor 0-nf 0 Car Cycle Floor 2 - This adjusts the car cycle for floor 2, and the car will cycle
between floors 1 and 2. To deactivate this feature, set either O12 or O13 to 0
(zero).
O14 floor 0-nf 1 Hall Independent Return Floor - This adjustment sets the return landing of the car
(when Hall Independent Service is activated).
O15 F/R 0-1 0 Hall Independent Return Door - This adjustment assigns which door will open at
the return landing (when the landing has with selective doors).
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O16 F/R 0-1 0 Low Oil Door - During low oil operation, this adjustment sets the selective doors to
open when returning to a landing.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O17 sec 20-255 100 Low Oil Timer - This adjustment sets how long the motor is allowed to run before
activating the low oil operation.
Note: If the floor-to-floor run time exceeds the timer value, the low oil operation
actives.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O18 floor 0-nf 1 Massachusetts Medical Floor - This adjustment sets which landing the car returns
to when Massachusetts Medical Service is activated.
Note: If a landing does not have front/rear openings (based on the value of O19),
the adjustment will be refused.
O19 F/R 0-1 0 Massachusetts Medical Door - This adjustment sets the selective door to open
landing return during Massachusetts Medical Recall Service Operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O20 — 0-1 0 Independent Overrides Lockouts - This adjustment (when enabled) allows the Car
Independent Service to override the Car Call Lockouts.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O21 floor 2-nf top floor Hoistway Access Top Floor - This adjustment sets which landing is designated for
the top landing of hoistway access operation.
See Also:O11 and O22
O22 inches 0-168 144 Hoistway Access Top Zone - When the car runs on hoistway access, this zone is the
distance (in inches) above the top hoistway access floor.
See Also: O11 and O21

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 31 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

O24 — 0-1 1 Transfer Calls on Door Close - This adjustment (if enabled) allows call transfers to
occur while the doors are closing.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O25 — 0-2 0 B44 Type - If this adjustment is set to a non-zero value, B44 and B44 redundancy
checks are enabled.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Invalid entry - defaults to Enabled
2 = Enabled
O26 — 0-1 0 A17 Type - Which type of A17 code to activate.
Values:
0 = A17 Disabled
1 = A17 Enabled
O27 — 0-1 0 EN81 Type - Which type of EN81 code to activate.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O28 sec 5-60 10 Non-Interference Time - The delay (in seconds) after the doors close, and before
SAPB calls can be latched. This time delay gives priority to car calls.
O33 floor 1-nf 0 Lobby Recall Return Landing - This adjustment sets the landing that lobby recall
will return to during lobby recall operation.
O34 F/R 0-1 0 Lobby Recall Door - This adjustment sets the preferred door to open at the lobby
recall landing during lobby recall operation.
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O35 sec 0-3600 300 Fan-Light Shutdown Timer - This adjustment sets the time that the fan and light
turn off (after all demand for service from the car has ended).
O36 floor 1-nf 0 Capture Return Landing -
Value:
0 = Stop car at the first available landing.
O37 F/R 0-2 0 Capture Door To Open -
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
2 = Both
O38 — 0-1 0 Capture Door Operation -
Values:
0 = The doors remain closed until opened with the CAPTD input.
1 = The doors open and stay open until deactivated.
O39 — 0-1 0 Capture Override Independent Service -
Values:
0 = No
1 = Yes
O40 — 0-1 0 Capture Override Car Stop Switch -
Values:
0 = No
1 = Yes

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 32 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

O41 — 0-1 0 Attendant Service Call Latch - This adjustment allows the attendant service to latch
car calls while the doors are open.
Values:
0 = Disable the latch
1 = Enable the latch
O42 — 0-1 0 This adjustment enables or disables the reverse car call cancel.
Values:
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
O43 — 0-255 0 Use this adjustment to enable or disable CE fixtures and VISTA monitoring.
Note: This adjustment also determines which communication protocol to use: 485,
232, or CAN.
Values:
0 = Off
1 = Enable CE fixtures on the 485 port
2 = Enable VISTA monitoring on the 485 port (if supported on given controller)
3 = Enable CE fixtures and VISTA monitoring shared on the 485 port (if supported
on given controller)
5 = Enable CE fixtures monitoring on the 232 port
6 = Enable VISTA monitoring on the 232 port
7 = Enable CE fixtures and VISTA monitoring shared on the 232 port
9 = Enable CE fixture on the car CAN channel 2
25 = Enable CE fixture on the car CAN channel 1
41 = Enable CE fixtures for Destination Dispatch on the car CAN Channel 2
57 = Enable CE fixtures for Destination Dispatch on the car CAN Channel 1
Bit Definitions:
0 = (1) - Enable CE fixtures
1 = (2) - Enable VISTA monitoring
2 = (4) - Communications Protocol
0 = Pipe Vista to 485 port
1 = Pipe Vista to 232 port for use with TAC20-03 (VISTA is only on 232
FB782/784)
3 = (8) - Communications Protocol
0 = Pipe CE fixtures to 485 port
1 = Pipe CE fixtures to a CAN channel determined by the next bit
4 = (16) - CAN Channel
0 = Pipe CE fixtures to CAN Channel 2 (if not 485 or 232)
1 = Pipe CE fixtures to CAN Channel 1
5 = (32) - Destination Dispatch
0 = No DSC present
1 = DSC present; enable in-car destination display
6 = (64) - CE ADA audible announcements
0 = Enable CE ADA audible announcements for Destination Dispatch
1 = Disable CE normal audible announcements for Destination Dispatch
7 = (128) - CE normal audible announcements
0 = Enable CE normal audible announcements
1 = Disable CE normal audible announcements (only if the Destination Dis-
patch bit is set)
O44 # of starts 100- 1500 Jack Resync Interval - This adjustment sets the number of motor starts necessary
2500 before the launch of automatic jack resync operations.
See Also: FJR and JRT
O45 — — — Sabbath Operation -

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 33 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

O48 — 0-1 — Automatic Hospital Emergency Service (HES) Enable - On a code blue call, the car
will automatically activate on HES.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
O49 — 0-30 7 Automatic Hospital Emergency Service (HES) Deactivation Timer - This adjustment
sets the time (sec.) that the doors must be open and no calls registered before the
car will go off of Automatic HES.
O53 — 0-1 0 Sabbath Operation Unsecured Floors Only Toggle - If set to 1, during Sabbath
Operation the car will serve secured floors.
Note: FSB/RSB must also be set to enable these floors.
Values:
0 = Do not stop at Secured Floors
1 = Stop at Secured Floors
O54 floor 1-nf 1 Sabbath Operation Main Floor - When the Sabbath Operation is initiated, this
adjustment sets the floor that the car will home to, to begin dispatching to selected
floors.
O55 opening 0-1 0 Sabbath Operation Main Floor Opening - When the Sabbath Operation is initiated,
this adjustment sets the door opening at the recall floor (that will open after hom-
ing), to begin dispatching to selected floors.
Values:
0 = Front doors
1 = Rear doors
O56 — 0-1 0 Sabbath Operation Door Close Buzzer - When on Sabbath Operation, if enabled,
the buzzer will sound for 3 seconds prior to the doors closing after stopping at a
Sabbath-served floor.
Values:
0 = Buzzer disabled
1 = Buzzer enabled
O57 floor 1-nfloors 1 Material Transfer Operation (MTO) Recall Floor - The car homes to this floor when
MTO is activated.
O58 F/R 0-1 0 Material Transfer Operation (MTO) Door to Open at Recall landing -
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
O59 sec 0-60 0 Material Transfer Operation (MTO) Recall Delay - The time delay before a car
responds to Material Transfer input.
O60 floor 1-nfloors 1 Lockdown Operation Landing - The designated lockdown floor when Lockdown
Operation is activated.
P10 — 1-3 1 Slowdown Type -
Values:
1 = Hoistway Up and Down slowdown switches
2 = Not used
3 = Encoder or tape-derived continuous position count slowdown
P11 — 0-5 0 Position Type -
Values:
0 = No Position Count Measuring System
1 = Tape Position Count Measuring System
2 = Encoder Position Count Measuring System
3 = Tape Encoder (TAC50-04)
4 = ISIS Tape (ISIS 2)

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 34 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

P12 — 0-1 0 Rear Leveling Vane -
Values:
0 = False (Front Selector only)
1 = True (both Front and Rear Selectors)
P13 — 0-1 1 Front Leveling Type -
Values:
0 = LVU and LVD both Off at floor level
1 = LVU and LVD both On at floor level
P14 — 0-1 1 Rear Leveling Type -
Values:
0 = LVU and LVD both Off at floor level
1 = LVU and LVD both On at floor level
P15 floor 0-1 0 Long Terminal Slowdowns -
Values:
0 = Slowdown vane active only at slowdown points.
1 = Slowdown vane active at terminal landing floor levels.
P16 cpf 0-65535 960 Encoder Counts (per foot) -
Position resolution of tape or encoder system.
P17 dpp 0-65535 1536 Up Slowdown Distance (for encoder and tape selectors) - The distance before the
target floor where the Up slowdown begins. To cause an earlier slowdown, increase
the P17 adjustment.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P18 dpp 0-65535 1536 Up Slowdown Distance (for encoder and tape selectors) - The distance before the
target floor where the Down slowdown begins. To cause an earlier slowdown,
increase the P18 adjustment.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P19 cpf 0-512 21 Encoder Level Distance (for encoder selectors) - The distance away from the floor
level count that will cause the car to relevel. Encoder leveling also requires adjust-
ment P21=1.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P20 dpp 0-1024 90 Encoder Count Tolerance (for encoder selectors) - The encoder position count must
be within the encoder count tolerance, when level at that floor.
Notes:
• The encoder recalibration at LVU and LVD vanes must not change the encoder
count by more than the encoder count tolerance.
• Failure of either the position count or the recalibration will result in the loss of
encoder position with recovery of a floor hunt or terminal hunt.
• There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
P21 — 0-1 0 Encoder Leveling -
Values:
0 = No encoder leveling
1 = Encoder leveling enabled (operative only on encoder selectors)
P22 dpp 0-16 6 Encoder Leveling Hysterisis - This adjustment prevents dithering on the re-level
activation point.
Notes:
• When the car is level, then the value of P22 is added to P19 encoded level dis-
tance to increase the level distance by P22.
• When the car crosses the re-level distance then the hysterisis is removed.
• The effect is to create a dead zone where the car will not re-level when sitting on
the re-level point.
See Also: P19, P21

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 35 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

PCL — — — Permission Change Log - This command displays the last five permission changes.
Note: The features with permission over-ride the features without permission.
PIA — — — Position Indication Adjustment - This command allows modification to the digital
position indication given at a specific floor.
Format: PIAHnn=xxxx,AA
nn = Floor number
xxxx = Bit pattern in Hex
AA = Alphanumeric characters on display monitors
Note: An alternative command is PIAAnn=AA
nn = Floor number
AA = Alphanumeric characters
PRT — — — Pressure Relief Test - This command allows running the car to the stop ring to per-
form a Pressure Relief Test.
1. Position the car at the top landing.
2. Put the car on Inspection Operation.
3. Run the car onto the Top Directional Limit (DL).
4. Issue the PRT Command.
5. Run the car Up on Inspection Operation past the DL.
PSI — — — Print Special I/O Inversion - This command prints all the registered special I/O
inversions.
See Also: ASI and DSI
PTI — — — Use this command to initialize the pre-torque settings -
Note: Set up the pre-torque with an estimate of the settings in order to speed up
the initial recalibration.
PUP — — — Power Up Message Display - This command displays all messages printed to the
Remote FAST (during power up).
Q10 floor 0-nf 10 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 0 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 0.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 10 in the car enters Call C11 to the controller, set Q10 =10 to
make car button 9 enter a code value of 0.
Q11 floor 0-nf 1 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 1 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 1.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 1 in the car enters Call C2 to the controller, set Q11=2 to make
car button 1 enter a code value of 1.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 36 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

Q12 floor 0-nf 2 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 2 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 2.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 2 in the car enters Call C3 to the controller, set Q12=3 to make
car button 2 enter a code value of 2.
Q13 floor 0-nf 3 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 3 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 3.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 3 in the car enters Call C4 to the controller, set Q13=4 to make
car button 3 enter a code value of 3.
Q14 floor 0-nf 4 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 4 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 4.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 4 in the car enters Call C5 to the controller, set Q14=5 to make
car button 4 enter a code value of 4.
Q15 floor 0-nf 5 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 5 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 5.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 5 in the car enters Call C6 to the controller, set Q15=6 to make
car button 5 enter a code value of 5.
Q16 floor 0-nf 6 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 6 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 6.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 6 in the car enters Call C7 to the controller, set Q16=7 to make
car button 6 enter a code value of 6.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 37 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

Q17 floor 0-nf 7 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 7 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 7.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 7 in the car enters Call C8 to the controller, set Q17=8 to make
car button 7 enter a code value of 7.
Q18 floor 0-nf 8 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 8 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 8.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 8 in the car enters Call C9 to the controller, set Q18=9 to make
car button 8 enter a code value of 8.
Q19 floor 0-nf 9 Coded Car Call Entry Code Digit 9 - This adjustment specifies which front car call
(up to button is used to enter the code value 9.
10) Notes:
• Used only for coded car call entry.
• If the building floor alignment makes the call input to the controller different from
the button marking in the car, use the value seen by the controller.
Example:
If pressing button 9 in the car enters Call C10 to the controller, set Q19=10 to make
car button 9 enter a code value of 9.
Q20 sec 0-15 0 Coded Car Call Code Entry Time - This adjustment sets the entry time for a security
code through the car call buttons. This feature requires IMS security.
Notes:
• When a passenger enters a car call at a locked out floor, the car station
accesses the keypad code and allows a code to be entered with car call buttons
C1 - C10.
• Adjustment Q20 should be set to zero (0) on all jobs that do not have IMS secu-
rity.
Q21 — 4-8 4 Coded Car Call Code Entry Count - This adjustment specifies the number of digits
in a code for coded car call entry.
Q22 — 0-1 0 Coded Car Call Entry Sound Buzzer on Entry - If set to 1, the car station buzzer will
activate each time a code button is pressed during coded car call entry operation.
Q23 0.1 sec 0-20 4 Coded Car Call Acknowledge Time - The amount of time that the coded car call
entry acknowledgement buzzer or device stays active after each code digit is
entered.
R10 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Monitor Operation - If enabled, the activation of an inconspic-
uous riser hall call will automatically activate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
R11 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Activates on HCP Loss - If enabled, the loss of the group hall
call power input will automatically activate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 38 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

R12 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Activates on Communication Loss - If enabled, the loss of the
group communications will automatically activate the Inconspicuous Riser Opera-
tion.
Values:
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate
R13 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates on Emergency Power - If enabled, the activation
of emergency power will automatically deactivate the Inconspicuous Riser Opera-
tion.
Values:
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate
R14 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates on Up Peak - If enabled, the activation of Up Peak
will automatically deactivate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not deactivate
1 = Deactivate
R15 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates on Down Peak - If enabled, the activation of Down
Peak will automatically deactivate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not deactivate
1 = Deactivate
R16 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Inhibits Front Car Calls - If enabled, the front car calls will be
inhibited while the Inconspicuous Riser Operation is active.
Values:
0 = Do not inhibit
1 = Inhibit
R17 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Inhibits Rear Car Calls - If enabled, the rear car calls will be
inhibited while the Inconspicuous Riser Operation is active.
Values:
0 = Do not inhibit
1 = Inhibit
R18 — 0-1 0 No Lantern Operation for Onward Car Calls on Inconspicuous Riser - If enabled,
Lantern Operation for onward car calls will be disabled during the Inconspicuous
Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not deactivate
1 = Deactivate
R19 — 0-1 0 No Inconspicuous Riser Lantern at Front Group Landings - If enabled, the lanterns
will not operate at front group landings while on the Inconspicuous Riser operation.
Values:
0 = Do not prevent
1 = Prevent
R20 — 0-1 0 No Inconspicuous Riser Lantern at Rear Group Landings - If enabled, the lanterns
will not operate at rear group landings while on the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not prevent
1 = Prevent

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 39 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

R21 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates on Code Blue - If enabled, the activation of Code
Blue will automatically deactivate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not deactivate
1 = Deactivate
R22 — 0-1 0 Independent Service Serves Only Inconspicuous Riser Landings - If enabled, the
operation of Independent Service while on Inconspicuous Riser Operation is limited
to landings that can be served while on Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
See also:GIC
Values:
0 = Do not limit
1 = Limit
R23 — 0-1 0 Independent Service Serves Only Group Landings - If enabled, the operation of
Independent Service while on Inconspicuous Riser Operation is limited to landings
that can be served while on Group Operation.
See also:GSC
Values:
0 = Do not limit
1 = Limit
R24 — 0-2 0 Group Calls only on Group Operation - This adjustment controls the service to car
calls while not on Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
See Command GSC to adjust Group landings.
Values:
0 = Do not limit Group service to Group designated landings.
1 = Limit Group service to Group designated landings.
2 = Limit Group service to Group designated landings, except for the car on Inde-
pendent Service - it will serve all car calls.
R25 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Activates on Attendant Service - If enabled, the activation of
Attendant Service will automatically activate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
Values:
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate
R26 sec 1-255 5 Inconspicuous Riser Deactivation Time - This adjustment sets the minimum
amount of time that the Inconspicuous Riser Operation will remain active (once it
has been activated).
Note: Typical adjustment value. The time required to enter the car and register a
destination car call after response to an Inconspicuous Riser hall call.
R27 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Activates Program B - If enabled, and the job is configured for
Tenant Security Program B Operation, the Inconspicuous Riser Operation will acti-
vate the Tenant Security Program B.
Values:
0 = Do not activate
1 = Activate
R28 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates Tenant Security - If enabled, the activation of the
Inconspicuous Riser Operation will deactivate Tenant Security.
Values:
0 = Do not deactivate
1 = Deactivate

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 40 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

R29 — 0-1 0 Answer all Group Calls before Inconspicuous Riser Activates - If enabled, the acti-
vation of the Inconspicuous Riser Operation will be delayed until all the group regis-
tered car calls have been completed.
Values:
0 = Do not delay activation
1 = Delay activation
R30 — 0-1 0 Answer all Inconspicuous Riser Calls before Group Activates - If enabled, the deac-
tivation of the Inconspicuous Riser Operation will be delayed until all of the Incon-
spicuous Riser registered car calls have been completed.
Values:
0 = Do not delay deactivation
1 = Delay deactivation
R31 — 0-1 0 Inconspicuous Riser Calls Latching during Swing Period -
Values:
0 = Calls will latch
1 = Calls will not latch
RCB — — — Reset Code Blue Calls - This command resets all registered Code Blue calls.
RFL — — — This command clears the fault buffer and resets all of the fault data.
RLD — — — Displays the Maximum Relevel Distance in the Log File - The log_car_dpp (20)
must be enabled through the OSD command.
RLOC — — — Clears the Maximum Relevel Distance in the Log File - The log_car_dpp (20) must
be enabled through the OSD command.
ROP — — — Rear Openings Display and Adjustment - This command displays the rear open-
ings served by this car.
Format: ROP[S/C][n]
S = Set
C = Clear
n = Floor number
Examples:
1. To display the rear openings served by this car, type ROP and press Enter.
2. To set the Floor #n to be a valid rear opening (where n starts at 1 for the
bottom floor), type ROPSn and press Enter.
3. To clear Floor #n (so that it is no longer a valid rear opening), type ROPCn and
press Enter.
See Also: FOP

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 41 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

RPDC — — — Ride Profile Dump Characteristics - Use this command to list the ride characteris-
tics of the previous run.
Example:
Type RPDC and press Enter. The display shows:
Ride Characteristics:
VEL 2 = 33 VEL 6 = 77
VEL 12 = 127 VEL GN = 90
VEL DC = 416 VEL TP = 450
VEL DC1 = 94 VEL DC2 = 103
Where:
VEL 2 = Car velocity is 2" from the floor in fpm
VEL 6 = Car velocity is 6" from the floor in fpm
VEL12 = Car velocity is 12" from the floor in fpm
VEL GN = Dictated velocity at the beginning of constant gain in fpm
VEL DC = Dictated velocity at the beginning of constant decel in fpm
VEL TP = Dictated velocity at the top speed in fpm
* VELDC1 = Velocity reduction at beginning of constant deceleration (in reduction
units)
* VELDC2 = Velocity reduction at the end of constant deceleration (in reduction
units)
* Note: VELDC1 should equal VELDC2 after a balanced load run (if the DTD param-
eter is adjusted correctly). On jobs of 200 fpm or less, VELDC2 will display a
0.
RRD — — — Reset Remote Diagnostics - This command resets the remote diagnostics.
RRF — — — Reset Run Monitor Faults - This command resets all of the run monitor faults.
RSB floor 1-nf none Sabbath Operation Rear Floors Served - Field selectable as to which front openings
are served while on Sabbath Operation.
S10 — 1-10 0 Security Type - This adjustment (for car functions only) is a type of required Tenant
Security. The Type # must be coordinated with the group security type and the
group functions.
Values:
0 = (TYPE 0) No security required, or the group invokes security and car
homes, and shuts down if the return landing (S11) is set
1 = (TYPE 1) Car Call Lockouts in the group
2 = (TYPE 2) Car Call Lockouts in the group with override inputs in the car
3 = (TYPE 3-1) Car Call Lockouts in the group with override inputs in the car
4 = (TYPE 3-2) Security override output only
5 = (TYPE 4) Group Hall Card readers is an invalid selection for the car
6 = (TYPE 5) Security Override output only
7 = (TYPE 6) Car Call Lockouts at the car level
8 = (TYPE 7) Car Call Lockouts at the car level (no group function)
9 = (TYPE 8) Contract configurated security
10 = (TYPE 9) Contract configurated security
S11 floor 1-nf 1 Security Return Landing - The car will home to this floor when placed on Security
Operation. The car call for this floor will not be locked out.
S12 F/R 0-1 0 Door to Open Upon Return - This adjustment selects which door (front or rear)
opens when the car is homed to the Security Return Landing (see S11).
Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 42 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

S13 — 0-1 0 Allow DOB on Security - This adjustment determines whether or not the Door Open
Button (DOB) is allowed to open the doors at a secured opening.
Note: This adjustment affects both front and rear doors.
Values:
0 = DOB is not allowed at secured floor.
1 = DOB is allowed at secured floor.
S14 — 0-1 0 One Car Call at a Time on Security - This adjustment allows registration of one car
call at a time while on security. All subsequent car call registrations will be inhib-
ited.
Values:
0 = Car calls are not limited to one at a time.
1 = Car calls are limited to one at a time.
S15 sec 0-255 30 Security Homing Delay - When Security Homing is enabled, this adjustment is the
delay that must expire before the car is forced to the security return landing.
S16 0.1 sec 0-255 50 Security Door Time - After security has homed the car, this adjustment is the
amount of time the doors will stand open when the car has arrived at the security
return landing.
S17 — 0-1 0 Security Exit Not Required - This adjustment allows all landings in a building to be
secured, including the security return landing.
Values:
0 = Security return landing can not be secured.
1 = Security return landing can be secured.
S18 — 0-1 0 Security Homing Enabled between Calls - This adjustment returns the car to the
security return landing when it has no calls.
Values:
0 = Security homing is not enabled.
1 = Security homing is enabled.
S19 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Lockout Activate - This adjustment will activate Program A
Security Lockout for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program A lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program A lockout block is activated.
S20 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Lockout Override Activate - This adjustment activates Program
A Lockout Overrides for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program A lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program A lockout block is activated.
S21 — 0-1 1 Security Program A Home On Init - Upon activation of Program A, this adjustment
will cause the car to home to the security return landing for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Do not home to return landing.
1 = Home to return landing.
S22 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Shuts Down Car - Upon activation of Program A, this adjust-
ment will cause the car to shut down for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Do not shut down
1 = Shut down

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 43 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

S23 — 0-1 1 Security Program A allows the car to answer unsecured Floor Calls during Emer-
gency Dispatch - While on Security Program A for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this
adjustment allows the car to run to unsecured floors when it is on Emergency Dis-
patch.
Values:
0 = Do not allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
1 = Allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
S24 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Independent Service Overrides - This adjustment activates
Independent Service to override lockouts when the car is on Security Program A for
TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = While simultaneously on Independent Service and Security Operation Program
A, Independent Service will only serve floors not secured.
Note: If Independent Service is active before security, all calls remain unsecured.
1 = During Security Program A, Independent Service will override lockouts.
S25 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Independent Service Activates Security Override Output -
When the car is on Security Program A for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment
prompts the Independent Service to activate (SOO).
Values:
0 = Independent Service will not activate the Security Override Output
Security Program A.
1 = Independent Service will activate the Security Override Output.
S26 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Inconspicuous Riser Overrides - This adjustment activates the
Inconspicuous Riser Operation to override the Security Program A for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will not override Security Program A.
1 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will override Security Program A.
S27 — 0-1 0 Security Program A Lanterns Only on Hall Call - When the car is on Security Pro-
gram A for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment prompts the lanterns to activate
only on the transfer of a hall call.
Values:
0 = Lanterns will operate normally during activation of Security Program A.
1 = Lanterns will operate only when a hall call is transferred by the car during acti-
vation of Security Program A.
S28 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Lockout Activate - This adjustment activates Program B Secu-
rity Lockout for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program B lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program B lockout block is activated.
S29 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Lockout Override Activate - This adjustment activates Security
Program B Lockout Overrides for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Security Program B lockout block is de-activated.
1 = Security Program B lockout block is activated.
S30 — 0-1 1 Security Program B Home On Init - Upon activation of Program B for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only, this adjustment activates the car to home to the security return land-
ing.
Values:
0 = Do not home to the return landing.
1 = Home to the return landing.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 44 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

S31 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Car Shuts Down - Upon activation of Program B for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only, this adjustment activates the car to shut down.
Values:
0 = Do not shut down
1 = Shut down
S32 — 0-1 1 Security Program B allows Car to answer unsecured Floor Calls during Emergency
Dispatch - While on Security Program B for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment
allows the car to run to unsecured floors when it is on Emergency Dispatch.
Values:
0 = Do not allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
1 = Allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
S33 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Independent Service Overrides - This adjustment activates
Independent Service to override lockouts when the car is on Security Program B for
TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = While simultaneously on Independent Service and Security Operation Program
B, Independent Service will only serve floors not secured.
Note: If Independent Service is active before security, all calls remain unsecured.
1 = During Security Program B, Independent Service will override lockouts.
S34 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Independent Service Activates Security Override Output -
When the car is on Security Program B for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment
prompts the Independent Service to activate (SOO).
Values:
0 = Independent Service will not activate the Security Override Output Security Pro-
gram B.
1 = During Security Program B, Independent Service will activate the Security
Override Output.
S35 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Inconspicuous Riser Overrides - This adjustment activates the
Inconspicuous Riser Operation to override the Security Program B for TYPE 8 or
TYPE 9 only.
Values:
0 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will not override Security Program B.
1 = Inconspicuous Riser Operation will override Security Program B.
S36 — 0-1 0 Security Program B Lanterns Only on Hall Call - When the car is on Security Pro-
gram B for TYPE 8 or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment prompts the lanterns to activate
only on the transfer of a hall call.
Values:
0 = Lanterns will operate normally during activation of Security Program B
1 = Lanterns will operate only when a hall call is transferred by the car during acti-
vation of Security Program B.
S37 sec 0-255 5 Security Program A Car Available Delay - While on Security Program A for TYPE 8
or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment sets the time delay that a car remains unavailable
for hall calls after completion of a previous call.
Values:
0 = Do not allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
1 = Allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
S38 sec 0-255 5 Security Program B Car Available Delay - While on Security Program B for TYPE 8
or TYPE 9 only, this adjustment sets the time delay that a car remains unavailable
for hall calls after completion of a previous call.
Values:
0 = Do not allow the car to answer unsecured calls.
1 = Allow the car to answer unsecured calls.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 45 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

S39 — 0-3 0 Car Call Lockout Override Registers Car Call - This adjustment activates a lockout
override input to register the associated car call.
Values:
0 = Lockout Override activation does not register the corresponding car call.
1 = Lockout Override activation registers the corresponding car call.
2 = While on Program A security, the Lockout Override activation registers the cor-
responding car call.
3 = While on Program B security, the Lockout Override activation registers the cor-
responding car call.
S40 floor 0-nf 0 Neo Natal Landing A -
S41 floor 0-nf 0 Neo Natal Landing B -
S42 floor 1-nfloors 1 Group Security Floor -
S43 — 0-11 0 Group Security Type -
S44 — 0-1 0 Disable Destination Calls To Secured Car Calls - To enable, set to 1.
S45 — 0-1 0 Limit Car Call Entry To One Call Per Card Swipe - To enable, set to 1.
S46 — 0-2 0 Group Tenant Security Type -
0 = Disable car call floor lockouts
1 = Enable car call floor lockouts
2 = Enable car call floor overrides
S47 sec 0-300 3 Tamper Indicator Time -
S48 sec 1-300 5 Ethernet Car Call Lockout Time - During Ethernet-based Security, the length of time
that the Security Server must be offline.
S49 — 0-1 0 Retain Lockouts if Security Server Goes Offline -
0 = Release lockouts
1 = Retain lockouts
SCA — — — Scan Call Assignment Table - Reviews the Scan Assignment Table of all floors.
Use the SCAA command to enter the following values (with their designations):

Value Designation
Rear Front
Calls Calls
0 0 Accept only Down hall calls for that floor
1 1 Accept only Up hall calls for that floor
2 2 Accept only Down hall calls for that floor
3 3 Accept both Up and Down hall calls for that floor

SCC — — — Set Car Call - To set the nth landing car call, type SCCn and press Enter.
Note: For rear calls, see SRC.
See Also: SCCB, SCCT, SDC, SRC, SRD, SRU, and SUC
SCCB — — — Set Car Call Bottom - This command sets the bottom landing car call. To set, type
SCCB and press Enter.
Notes:
• If the bottom landing has a front opening, the front car call will be set.
• If the bottom landing does not have a front opening, the rear car call will be set.
See Also: SCC, SCCT, SDC, SRC, SRD, SRU, SUC

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 46 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

SCCT — — — Set Car Call Top - This command sets the top landing car call. To set, type SCCT
and press Enter.
Notes:
• If the top landing has a front opening, the front car call will be set.
• If the top landing does not have a front opening, the rear car call will be set.
See Also: SCC, SCCB, SDC, SRC, SRD, SRU, SUC
SCF — — — Close Floors Display and Adjustment -
Format: SCF[n]=[v]
n = Floor number
v = 0: No close landing 1: The next floor above is a close landing from this
floor
Examples:
1. To display the close landing status for each floor, type SCF and press Enter.
2. To set Floor number 3 to be the lower floor of a close landing pair (where n is 1
for the bottom floor), type SCF3=1 and press Enter.
3. To clear Floor #n so that it is not the lower floor of a close landing pair, type
SCFn=0 and press Enter.
SFA — — — Secured Floors All Display - This command displays all secured floors to the
Remote FAST.
SFD — — — Secured Floors Dispatch - This command will display and/or modify secured floors
from IMS monitoring functions (such as Dispatch Screens and Remote Car Sta-
tion).
See Also: DSF
Format: SFD[R][S/U][n]
R = Rear
S = Secure
U = Unsecure
n = Floor Number (or * for all floors)
Examples:
1. To display the front secured floors, type SFD and press Enter.
2. To display the rear secured floors, type SFDR and press Enter.
3. To secure the third front floor, type SFDS3 and press Enter.
4. To unsecure all of the front floor landings, type SFDU* and press Enter.
5. To secure all of the rear floor landings, type SFDRS* and press Enter.
6. To unsecure the second rear landing, type SFDRU2 and press Enter.
SFL — — — Secure Floor Lockout - This command locks out access to a floor from its car call
button (Fire Service will override).
See Also: DSF
Format: SFL[R][S/U][n]
R = Rear
S = Secure
U = Unsecure
n = Floor Number (or * for all floors)
Examples:
1. To lock out the rear door on floor 3, type SFLRS3 and press Enter.
2. To unlock the front door on floor 3, type SFLU3 and press Enter.
3. To unlock all front doors, type SFLU* and press Enter.
4. To display the lock out status for all front doors, type SFL and press Enter.
5. To display the lock out status for rear floor 3, type SFLR3 and press Enter.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 47 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

SFS — — — Security Floor Subset - This command allows display or modification of the
secured floor Subset A or secured floor Subset B (for Tenant Security). The com-
mand syntax requires the suffix of A or B to determine which subset is involved.
Format: SFS[A/B][R][S/U][n]
A = Subset A
B = Subset B
R = Rear
S = Secure
U = Unsecure
n = Floor Number (or * for all floors)
Examples:
1. To display Front Subset A, type SFSA and press Enter.
2. To display Rear Subset A, type SFSAR and press Enter.
3. To add * to the A Front Subset, type SFSAS* and press Enter.
4. To remove 3 from the B Front Subset, type SFSBU3 and press Enter.
5. To add 3 to the B Rear Subset, type SFSBRS3 and press Enter.
6. To remove all floors from the A Rear Subset, type SFSARU* and press Enter.
SFT — — — Secured Floor Tenant - This command displays all floors that are secured because
of Tenant Security.
See Also: DSF
Examples:
1. To display all Front landings secured by Tenant Security, type SFT and press
Enter.
2. To display all Rear landings secured by Tenant Security, type SFTR and press
Enter.
SLD — — — Selector Diagnostics Display Command -
Type SLD and then press Enter to display the following information:
Leveling State
0 = OK
1 = Lost
2 = Critical Fault
Position State
0 = OK
1 = Lost
2 = Critical Fault
Slowdown State
0 = OK
1 = Lost
2 = Critical Fault
Pos Cnt
The encoder or tape selector position count. When neither encoder nor tape, this
value matches CarPos.
Nearest Floor
The encoder or tape selector nearest floor derived from present position count.
When neither encoder nor tape, this value matches CarPos.
Car Pos
The selector floor number (where 1 is the bottom floor), steps at each slowdown
point.
SPC — — — Configure the Safety Processor System with the Jobs Variable Parameters -
Note: The SP Programming Jumper JP2 (located on the IOD card) must be
installed.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 48 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

SPCAN — — — This command displays the Safety Processor CAN bus status for car and hall
channels.
SPCD — — — Safety Processor Configuration Display - This command displays the following
information:
• RearSelectorPreset = YES/NO
• RearDoorPresent = YES/NO
• TopHWACPresent = YES/NO
• Bottom\HWAC Present = YES/NO
• FreightDoorPresetn = YES/NO
• CarNumber = 1 to MaxCars
To configure these Safety Processor parameters, see SPC.
SPN — — — Service Car PIN Code - This command allows the user to set/view the PIN code for
the service car through the keypad or kiosk.
SRC — — — Set Rear Car Call - This command registers a rear car call from the Remote FAST.
Format: SRCn
n - is the floor number for the rear car call to be registered
SRCB — — — This Command Sets The Bottom Rear Car Call -
SRCT — — — This Command Sets The Top Rear Car Call -
SRL — — — Rear Landing Display and Adjustment - This command displays the rear selec-
tor leveling status for each floor.
Format: SRL[n]=[v]
n = Floor number
v = 0: Floor uses Front Selector Leveling 1: Floor uses Rear Selec-
tor Leveling
Examples:
1. To set Floor #n to use Rear Selector Leveling (where n is 1 for the bottom
floor), type SRLn=1 and press Enter.
2. To set Floor #n to use Front Selector Leveling, type SRLn=0 and press Enter.
SRQ — — — Show Requests - This command displays the state of every elevator option that is
trying to activate. The option name is shown, along with a number that represents
the state of the option.
SSE — — — Show Requests - This command will toggle the motion screen display from show
position to motor encoder speed.
SSS — — — This Command Shows the Security Status - (used by Ethernet Security).
STBC — — — Shunt Trip Breaker Control (Detroit Fire Service) -
STE — — — Show Requests - This command sends a test event for remote monitoring.
STU — — — Selector Setup Command - This command toggles the setup mode On and Off.
Notes:
• To allow the car to learn the appropriate front versus rear leveling vanes for each
floor, during the setup mode, run the car on Inspection Operation from the bot-
tom of the hoistway to the top.
• The floor position counts will also be learned for encoder or tape selectors.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 49 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

SXZ — — — Express Zone Display and Adjustment - This command displays the express zone
status for each floor.
Format: SXZ[n]=[v]
n = Floor number
v = 0: No express zone above this floor 1: Express zone immediately
above this floor
Examples:
1. To set an express zone immediately above Floor #n (where n is 1 for the
bottom floor), type SXZn=1 and press Enter.
2. To clear the express zone immediately above Floor #n, type SXZn=0 and press
Enter.
T10 — 0-1 0 Traffic Reporting Enable - This adjustment collects traffic data to a USB flash drive
(inserted into the CPU Card). To enable, set to 1.
T11 — — 68 Traffic Reporting Data Filter - Determines which type of calls are collected during a
traffic survey -
14 = Hall calls only
24 = Car calls only
44 = Destination calls only
74 = All call types
T12 Kbytes — 512 Event Monitor RAM Size - The amount of USB flash memory that is reserved for
traffic and data files during a traffic monitor survey.
T13 — 0-1 0 Dispatcher Cost File Generation - Include the dispatcher cost monitor data in the
traffic monitor/survey data. To enable, set to 1.
T14 — — 15 Mask for Event Recording - Determines which type of event data is collected during
a traffic survey -
01 = Arrival
02 = Departure
03 = Service status
10 = Door status
20 = Motion parameters
40 = Floor positions
77 = All event types
TAG — — — Display LAST TAG in Memory - Factory Use Only.
TECC — — — Teach CAN Configuration -
TECCR — — — Erases the TECC configuration information on all HN and HNB nodes communicat-
ing on Channels 2 and 3.
TECCV — — — Provides automated verification that the configuration data loaded via the TECC
Command was loaded successfully into each node.
TECF — — — Teach Front Risers -
TECR — — — Teach Rear Risers -
TFR — — — Tach Fault Reset - This command resets software tach faults, critical drive faults,
and latches SCR faults.
TIM — — — Time - This command sets the length of time (total number of days) since the last
CPU power-up.
Display: Days-Hours:mins:secs.
TMP — — — Display Current Ambient Controller Temperature -

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 50 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

TR1 — 0-12 0 Trace Record Type - This adjustment specifies the mode of the Trace Record.
Values:
0 = The Trace Record is inactive.
1 = Started manually, ends when the buffer is full.
2 = Started manually, runs as circular buffer until stopped manually.
3 = Started by trigger condition, stops when the buffer is full.
4 = Started by two simultaneous trigger conditions, stops when the buffer is full.
5 = Started by either of two trigger conditions, stops when the buffer is full.
6 = Started by a sequence of two trigger conditions, stops when the buffer is full.
7 = Started by a sequence of three trigger conditions, stops when the buffer is full.
8 = Started manually, stopped by a trigger condition.
9 = Started manually, stopped by two simultaneous trigger conditions.
10 = Started manually, stopped by either of two trigger conditions.
11 = Started manually, stopped by a sequence of two trigger conditions.
12 = Started manually, stopped by a sequence of three trigger conditions.
See Also: TRA
TR2 — 1-10 1 Number of Data Words - This adjustment specifies the number of elements (or
channels) that the Trace Record will save.
See Also: TRA
TR3 — 0-3500 0 Index into the Trace Record Buffer - This adjustment displays the current index into
the Trace Record Buffer (and can also be set to any specific index).
See Also: TRA
TR4 — 0-1 0 Trace Record Changes Only - This adjustment causes the Trace Record to save
only a record that does not match the previous record. This action records only the
changes to sequence but not time.
Values:
0 = Store all data to buffer
1 = Store to the buffer only on data change
See Also: TRA

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 51 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

TRA — — — Trace Recorder - Advanced memory monitor and debugger.
See Also: TR1, TR2, TR3, or TR4
TRACE RECORDER COMMAND SUMMARY

TRACE RECORDER COMMANDS

Get Trace Type DRC
Adjust Trace Type DRC=n 0-12
Trace Dump Command DRD or DRDn W, H, HW, or WH
Get the Number of Data Words DRW
Adjust number of Data Words DRW=n 1 -10
Get the Trace Buffer Index DRX
Adjust Trace Buffer Index DRX=n 1-3500
Trace Commands
Adjust Trace Offset TRAAn=xxxxH 1-10
Adjust Trace Segment (default) TRAS=xxxxH
Adjust Trace Segment (by number) TRASn=xxxxH 1-10
Adjust Trace (by name) TRANn=ABCDEF 1-10
Set Value of Trace TRAVn=xxxxH** 1-10
Display List of Trace Commands TRA?
Display the full Address of Trace TRAn 1-10
Display the Value of the Trace TRAVn 1-10
TRIGGER COMMANDS
Adjust Trigger Segment TRGSn=xxxxH 1-3
Adjust Trigger Offset TRGAn=xxxxH 1-3
Adjust Trigger Mask TRGMn=xxxxH ** 1-3
Adjust Trigger Value TRGVn=xxxxH ** 1-3
Adjust Trigger (by name) TRGNn=ABCDEF 1-3
Display List of Trig Commands TRG?
Display Trigger Value TRGVn 1-3
Adjust Trigger (by name) TRGNn=ABCDEF 1-3
Display List of Trig Commands TRG?
Display Trigger Value TRGVn 1-3
Get Edge Trigger TRGE
Adjust Edge Trigger TRGE=n 0-1
Display the Trigger Mask TRGMn 1-3
Display Trigger Address TRGn 1-3
** The input value xxxxH can be either Hex or Decimal.

TRG — — — Data Record Trigger Command - This command adjusts the internal clock time.
See Also: TRA
UDLx — — — UDLD = Lists all files on the USB stick drive currently in the “/tke/update” folder.
UDL-tac-cpua.vxry = Copies the “tac-cpua.vxry” file from the “/tke” folder to the “/
tke/update” folder.
UDL-jobxxnnnn.cfg = Copies the “jobxxnnnn.cfg” file from the “/tke” folder to the
“/tke/update” folder.
UDLS = Saves all the controller files to the USB stick drive folder “/tke/backup/
xxnnnn.”
UDLR jobnumber = Copies files from the “/tke/backup/xxnnnn” folder to the “/tke/
update” folder.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 52 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

UFW — — — Input = Update Firmware on CN/HN
Additional UFW Adjustments (all Inputs):
UFWH = Display Update Firmware Help.
UFWCNC = Update CN Firmware on Car CANbus.
UFWCNH = Update CN Firmware on Hall CANbus.
UFWHNB = Update Front and Rear HN Firmware for Selected Riser.
UFWHNF = Update Front HN Firmware for Selected Riser.
UFWHNR = Update Rear HN Firmware for Selected Riser.
UFWSPF = Update Safety Processor software from a USB stick drive.
UFWCWF = CWIL/DPIA from USB stick.
UFWSLF = SELB from USB stick.
UFWHNBF = HNB from USB stick.
UFWCDI — — — This command updates the CDI Firmware -
UPD — — — This command updates the tags from the factory Job update image -
UPDA — — — This command updates all tags without prompting the user -
UTM — — — Up Time Display - This command displays the time the controller has been up
since the last RUT command.
V10 sec — — VIP Call Door Standing Time -
V11 - V25 — — — VIP Call Priority - Establish priorities for car response to VIP calls -
0 = Disable service
V11 = Highest priority call
V25 = Lowest priority call
VER — — — Version - This adjustment displays the version/revision and part number of the car
generic software, and the DSP and ETSD/L.
Also displayed (if applicable):
• Integral group
• BETA S/W
• Enhanced CPU
• Word wide job EPROM
• Custom Software: Shell, and contract generic package number/revision.
WJR — — — Display Jack Resynch Activity -
WRT — — — Write Parameters - This command saves the working values in RAM memory to the
EEPROM (which protects the working values in the event the controller's power is
lost).
Note: On power-up, or if the terminal is disconnected, the working values are read
from EEPROM into RAM memory.
WRTG — — — This command writes group adjustments to all cars in the group.
X10 — 0-1 1 Audible Car Call Enable - This adjustment provides an audible signal to alert a
handicapped passenger that a car call has been accepted by the elevator.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
X11 — 0-1 1 Arrow Type - This adjustment sets the direction and preference arrows.
Direction arrows indicate direction of actual car movement.
Preference arrows indicate direction in which car has a preference to run.
Values:
0 = Direction arrows
1 = Preference arrows
2 = Preference and direction arrows

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 53 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

X12 — 0-1 0 Car Lantern at Door Reversal Limit - This adjustment enables car lantern operation
when the door reaches the reversal limit switch.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
X13 — 0-1 1 Car Lantern at Lobby - This adjustment enables car lantern operation when the car
reaches the lobby.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
X14 0.1 sec 1-48 5 Flasher Rate - This adjustment sets the flashing rate for the flashing jewels.
X15 — 0-4 2 Front Lantern Type - This adjustment sets the type of lanterns used for front open-
ings.
Values:
0 = No Lanterns
1 = Car Lanterns only
2 = Hall Lanterns only
3 = Both Car and Hall Lanterns
4 = Arrival Lanterns
X16 0.1 sec 0-40 3 Lantern Delay at Lobby - This adjustment sets the delay time of lantern activation
at lobby.
X17 — 0-2 0 Lantern Fire Position - This adjustment sets when the lanterns activate during fire
service.
Values:
0 = At slow-down
1 = At leveling zone
2 = At floor level
X18 0.1 sec 0-20 4 Lantern Off Time - This adjustment sets the duty of the off time during on/off cycle
of lanterns and gongs operation.
X19 0.1 sec 0-20 4 Lantern On Time - This adjustment sets the duty of the on time during on/off cycle
of lanterns and gongs operation.
X20 min 0-10 0 PI Timeout Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before the position indica-
tors (PI) will turn off (if allowed by other options that may be active).
Note: If this value is not set, PI Timeout will not be allowed.
X21 — 0-4 2 Rear Lantern Type - This adjustment sets the type of lanterns used for rear
openings.
Values:
0 = No Lanterns
1 = Car Lanterns only
2 = Hall Lanterns only
3 = Both Car and Hall Lanterns
4 = Arrival Lanterns
X22 — 0-2 1 Floor Passing Tone to Buzzer - This adjustment sets whether or not the buzzer in
the car station will be used for the floor passing tone.
Values:
0 = The buzzer in the car station will not be used for the floor passing tone.
1 = The buzzer in the car station will be used for the floor passing tone (only if FPT
does not exist).
2 = The buzzer in the car station will be used for the floor passing tone.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 54 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

X23 — 3-4 4 Number of Display Characters - This adjustment sets the number of display
characters available in the Digital PI.
Values:
3 = 3-character display
4 = 4-character display
X24 0.1 sec 1-20 3 GAL Tone Timer Adjustment - This adjustment sets the actual length of time that
the floor passing tone signal will be active (to indicate that the car is passing or
arriving at a new floor).
X25 1/16 sec. 1-48 8 Flashing Timer - This adjustment sets the flashing rate of flashing jewels.
X26 1/16 sec. 1-48 2 Flickering Timer - This adjustment sets the flickering rate of flickering jewels.
X27 — 0-1 0 VIP Indicator -
Set to 1 = VIP indicator output remains active when on Auto ISC and O48 set to 1.
Set to 0 = Turn off the VIP indicator after a car answers a VIP call.
X29 — 0-1 0 Active Signage Fixtures for Destination Dispatch Front -
Values:
0 = Not Present
1 = Present
X30 — 0-1 0 Active Signage Fixtures for Destination Dispatch Rear -
Values:
0 = Not Present
1 = Present
Z10 — 0-1 0 Emergency Dispatch - Use this adjustment when communication with the group is
lost.
Values:
0 = Emergency dispatching is allowed.
1 = Emergency dispatching is not allowed.
Z11 — 0-max 0 Lobby Stop Landing - This adjustment sets the landing used for Lobby Stop Oper-
floor ation. The car stops and cycles the doors at this landing.
Z12 — 0-2 0 Independent Service Call Latch - This adjustment allows independent service to
latch car calls while the doors are open.
Values:
0 = Disable independent service call latch.
1 = Enable independent service call latch, and flush all car calls on arrival.
2 = Enable independent service call latch, and leave further car calls latched on
arrival.
Z13 — 0-1 0 VIP Service - This adjustment enables the car to perform VIP service in response to
a Group Code Blue call.
Values:
0 = Disable VIP Service
1 = Enable VIP Service
Z14 — 0-1 0 Door Open Time Saver - This adjustment shortens the door time when the safety
edge (SE) is activated.
Values:
0 = Disable door open time saver (using SE).
1 = Enable door open time saver (using SE).

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 55 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

Z15 — 0-3 0 Forcing Door Close - This adjustment is used for MAC DC door operators. DC will
not be active during a run. Possibly used for freight, if required.
Values:
0 = No MAC
1 = Front MAC Only
2 = Rear MAC Only
3 = Both Front and Rear MAC
Z16 — 0-1 0 B44 Nudging - This adjustment is intended only for use on installations (outside of
the United States) which allow fire service operation to be provided without smoke/
heat sensors.
Note: This adjustment allows nudging to activate without a call in the system. Once
nudging becomes active, the electronic door edge will be ignored and the corre-
sponding doors will close at reduced speed.
Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Z17 — 0-1 0 Car Station Displays Hall Calls while on Attendant Service -
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Z18 — 0-2 0 Hall Node Failure Emergency Dispatch Type
Values:
0 = Hall Node Failure Emergency Dispatch Disabled
1 = Type 1 Hall Node Failure Emergency Dispatch
2 = Type 2 Hall Node Failure Emergency Dispatch
Hall Node Failure Emergency Dispatch Operation (2 Types)
Type 1: Normal Operation
• Scans the front and rear hall riser for offline hall nodes.
• The riser is scanned in 30-second increments.
• Once a hall node is found to be offline, a car call for that floor will be registered
(if permissions allow).
Type 2: Special Case Operation
• One HN has the entire hall riser input.
• All hall calls come to one HN and if that HN goes offline, the whole riser is out.
• Type 2 Operation scans for the controlling HN, (e.g. the HN with a node
address of TopFloor+1).
• If the controlling HN is offline, then Type 2 Operation registers car calls at
every floor.
• When the terminals are reached, the opposite terminal registered a call to
keep the preference.
Notes:
• Used in conjunction with Z10.
• When Z10 = 1, or Z18 = 0, the car will not emergency dispatch because of hall
node failure.
Z25 sec 0-3000 45 Group Service Protection Timer - This adjustment sets the time limit for the car to
be on service protection.
Note: To disable the car side service protection, set to zero (0).
Z32 — — — Light Turn Off Timer -
Z33 sec 0-3600 300 Car Fan Turn Off Timer - The car idle time required before the cab fan turns off.
Z34 sec 0-3600 300 Car Light Turn Off Timer - The car idle time required before the cab lights turn off.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 56 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Adjustments and Commands

Adj. Unit Range Default Definition (Continued)

Z35 — 0-1 0 Disable Loadweigher Recalibration - This adjustment allows the automatic load-
weigher recalibration to be disabled.
Values:
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
Z38 — — — Hoistway Access Bottom Floor Door Selection -
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Z39 — — — Hoistway Access Top Floor Door Selection -
Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Z40 sec 0-60 20 VIP Operation Run Delay Time - The seconds of delay before a car runs to a VIP call
after answering the last car call.
Z41 — 0-1 0 Dispatch to VIP Call Immediately (Code Blue Operation) - Set to 1 to enable.
Z42 — 0,7,15 0 VIP Voice Message ID - Select message to activate with VIP call -
0 = No message
7 = Code Blue message
15 = Custom message (requires custom chip).
Z43 — 0-1 0 Enable VIP Operation - Set to 1 to enable.
Z44 sec. 0-10 2 Run Stall Time (Required by California) - This adjustment will set a timer that will
quickly detect a stalled Up Run.
This timer is intended to prevent faults such as:
• A motor burn-out (in the event of a motor phase reversal).
• Running Up after the rupture valve has activated (to prevent emptying the tank).
Z45 — — Job Discrete Hoistway Access Run Inputs Used - This adjustment should only be
EPROM enabled on modernization jobs in Canada with Safety Processor Version 2 or later.
The adjustment enables the controller and safety processor to read the HWAC Run
Inputs on IMS port 17, IOC2 CON 33.
Z46 — — Job Dual Processor CAN Inputs Used - This adjustment should only be enabled on jobs
EPROM in Canada with Safety Processor Version 2 or later. The adjustment enables the
controller and safety processor to support the DPIA and HNB boards.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 57 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller NP Fault Codes

NP Fault Codes
NTSD Processor

NP Fault Description Possible Solutions

2801 The top terminal slowdown was activated – The NP detected • Check the NTST magnet
NTST active while running Up Fast. • Check the motor and valves
2802 The bottom terminal slowdown was activated - The NP • Check the NTSB magnet
detected NTSB active while running Down Fast. • Check the motor and valves
2803 The top terminal stopping was activated – The NP detected • Check the DL magnet
DL active and NTST active while running Up. • Check the NTST magnet
• Check the motor and valves
2804 The bottom terminal stopping was activated - The NP • Check the DL magnet
detected DL active and NTSB active while running Down. • Check the NTSB magnet
• Check the motor and valves
2805 The test outputs were not commanded within three (3) auto-
matic runs.
2806 A FAST solenoid output test failure.
2807 A safety string output test failure.
2808 A TSMC data message Node A was not received. • Check the car CAN channel
• Check the TSMC
2809 A corrupted TSMC Node A CAN message was received.
2810 A corrupted TSMC Node B CAN message was received.
2811 A corrupted main CPU CAN message was received.
2812 A duplicate TSMC Node A was detected.
2813 A car CAN channel bus Off failure.
2814 A programming jumper was enabled.
2815 A/C peak reference timeout - The NP lost A/C power, so the
A/C inputs cannot be sampled.
2816 A duplicate TSMC Node B was detected.
2817 A TSMC data message Node B was not received. • Check the car CAN channel
• Check the TSMC
2818 A TSMC Node A and Node B data mismatched.
2819 NP failed to configure the IOD FPGA.
2820 Bottom limit override and running fast.
2821 TSRCPM went false during fast valve test.
2822 TSRCPM went false during safety string output test.
2823 SELA message timed out at power ON.
2824 SELA Node A corrupted version message.
2825 SELA Node B corrupted version message.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 58 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller SP Fault Codes

SP Fault Codes
Safety Processor

SP Fault Description Possible Solutions

2701 Terminal speed reduction device activated – The SP detected • Check the motor and valves
Up Fast active while the TSR1 or TSR2 magnets were active. • Check the TSR1 and TSR2 magnets
2702 Excessive HWAC/Inspection speed detected – The SP • Check the motor and valves
detected Up Fast or Down Fast active while on inspection
operation.
2703 Revert from car top inspection to automatic detected – The • Contact the factory
SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on car top
inspection without car top inspection run inputs.
2704 Revert from bypass operation to automatic detected - The SP • Contact the factory
detected Up or Down solenoids active while on bypass oper-
ation.
2705 Revert from hoistway access operation to automatic detected • Contact the factory
- The SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on
hoistway access operation without hoistway access run
inputs.
2706 Revert from machine room inspection to automatic detected - • Contact the factory
The SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on
machine room inspection without machine room inspection
run inputs.
2707 During car top inspection an invalid I/O was detected. • Check the car top inspection inputs
• Check the car CAN channel
• Check the CWIL
2708 During bypass operation an invalid I/O was detected. • Check the car door bypass switch
• Check the hoistway door bypass switch
2709 During hoistway access operation an invalid I/O was • Check the hoistway access inputs
detected. • Check the car CAN channel
• Check the hall CAN channel
• Check the HNB
• Check the CWIL
2710 During machine room inspection, an invalid I/O was • Check the machine room inspection switch
detected. • Check the machine room inspection buttons
2711 Bottom limit override crosscheck failure - The SP detected • Check BLO
that BLO and BLOM are in the same state. • Check BLOM
2712 The test outputs were not commanded within three (3) auto- • Contact the factory
matic runs.
2713 Safety string output test failure. • Check the safety circuit
• Contact the factory
2714 CHKHA crosscheck failure. • Contact the factory
2715 TSMC data message was not received. • Check the car CAN channel
• Check TSMC
2716 Car top data message was not received. • Check the car CAN channel
• Check the CWIL

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 59 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller SP Fault Codes

SP Fault Description Possible Solutions

2717 Top hoistway access data message was not received. • Check the hall CAN channel
• Check the HN Board
2718 Bottom hoistway access data message was not received. • Check the hall CAN channel
• Check the HN Board
2719 A corrupted TSMC Node A CAN message was received. • Contact the factory
2720 A corrupted TSMC Node B CAN message was received. • Contact the factory
2721 A corrupted car top CAN message was received. • Contact the factory
2722 A corrupted top hoistway access CAN message was • Contact the factory
received.
2723 A corrupted bottom hoistway access CAN message was • Contact the factory
received.
2724 A corrupted main CPU CAN message was received. • Contact the factory
2725 A duplicate TSMC Node was detected. • Verify that there is only one TSMC connected
• Contact the factory
2726 A duplicate car top node was detected. • Verify that there is only one CWIL connected
• Contact the factory
2727 A duplicate top hoistway access node was detected. • Verify that there is only one top hall node board
configured/connected
• Contact the factory
2728 A duplicate bottom hoistway access node was detected. • Verify that there is only one bottom HN Board
configured/connected
• Contact the factory
2729 A car CAN channel bus Off failure. • Check the car CAN termination
2730 A hall CAN channel bus Off failure. • Check the hall CAN termination
2731 An input failure was detected.
2732 A programming jumper was enabled.
2733 A/C peak reference timeout – The SP has lost A/C power, so
the A/C inputs cannot be sampled.
2734 Re-level with FAST solenoid detected.
2735 Car top inspection node crosscheck error.
2736 Top HWAC Node A / Node B crosscheck error.
2737 Bottom HWAC Node A / Node B crosscheck error.
2738 TSRCPM lost during output test.
2739 TSMC message was not received at power On.
2740 Car top inspection message was not received at power On.
2741 A corrupted TSMC Node A terminal message.
2742 A corrupted TSMC Node A version message.
2743 A corrupted car top inspection CAN message.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 60 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

SP Fault Description Possible Solutions

2744 A corrupted top HWAC CAN message version.
2745 A corrupted bottom HWAC CAN message version.
2746 TSMC Node A / Node B data crosscheck error.

Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

981 Terminal Slowdown was activated before normal slowdown;
This fault does not shut the car down.
1002 OS could not allocate memory - This fault is mainly used dur- • Noise levels that affect CPU operation
ing software development, but proves useful to detect opera- • Defective CPU software allocates too much mem-
tional issues on installed units. ory (only when installing new software version)
1003 Factory Use Only.
1004 Gate and locks opened during a run - A car or hoistway inter- • Car doors clipping interlocks
lock opened while the car was running. • Defective I/O
• Defective gate contact
• Defective wiring
1005 DOL was detected while HW closed. • A defective DOL input
• A defective HDIF input
1006 The hoistway interlock failed to close. • A defective I/O
• A defective hoistway door contact
• A blocked hoistway door
1007 The safety string opened during a run and caused an emer- • An open device in the safety string
gency stop. • A defective I/O
1008 The motor contactor is already energized (MCD/MCE) - A run • A defective I/O
initiation was issued, but either MCD was already inactive, or • Software activation error
MCE was already active. • Defective relays
1009 • A valve contact error (MCD is open) • A defective MCD input
• A Down run failure • A defective MCE input
• Either the valves or MC are not ready • Defective relays
• MCD is inactive, or MCE is active during a Down run
1010 • Motor contactor error (MCD Open) • Defective MCD input
• MCD failed to energize or MCE failed to de-energize after • Defective MCE input
run • Defective MC contact
• Defective relays
1011 • The motor contactor failed to energize (MCD/MCE) • A defective MCD input
• MCD is active, or MCE is inactive after a run • A defective MCE input
• A defective MC contact
• Defective relays
Possible Solutions:
• Verify the starting current on the solid state
starter
1012 • Job Image error - Invalid number of floors • Contact the factory

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 61 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1013 NV hardware failure - The software issued a command to • A defective CPU
modify non-volatile memory that was not completed, or com- Possible Solutions:
pleted with invalid results. • Replace the CPU
1014 NV checksum error - The data in non-volatile memory was • A defective CPU
lost. Possible Solutions:
• Replace the CPU
1015 Software error - The software is making an invalid NV
request.
1016 Software error - The NV is full and cannot hold another client
structure. There is no more room for data in non-volatile
memory.
1017 Software error - A change in run type occurred during a run.
The car is not performing an emergency stop and the soft-
ware has changed the type of run.
1018 Normal limit error - Both of the top and bottom normal limits • Defective wiring
(DLB/DLT) are active at the same time. • A defective I/O
1019 • The normal limits and the car position do not agree • Defective wiring
• The selector is not lost • A defective I/O
• The car position is not at the top or bottom floor
• The I/O DLT and DLB do not agree
1020 Software error - The I/O database has been corrupted, or the •
checksum for I/O has changed.
1021 • Inspection indicates an invalid I/O condition • A wiring error
• The status of an I/O indicates a combination of active • A defective I/O: IN, INOP, INHA, INCN, INCT,
and inactive inputs that are not allowed INHAM
1022 Run monitor - The run protect timer has expired. • Ran too long at leveling speed.
1023 Run monitor - The wrong direction run. The software issued a • Defective wiring
command to run in one direction, but the car actually ran in • Defective I/O
the other direction.
1024 Excessive number of re-levels - A fault is issued if the eleva- • A defective valve
tor re-levels more than 25 times within a 5-minute interval. • A mis-adjusted valve
1027 Door zone monitor error - The door zone monitor input was
not activated when expected.
Notes:
• DZM should be only be inactive if DZ1, DZ2, and DZE are
active.
• DZM should be active all other times.
1028 The selector shows the level outside of the door zone - The
inputs indicate that the car is level at the floor-at some loca-
tion other than within the door zone.
1029 LU and LD are active at same time - This fault indicates that
both level up and level down inputs are active at the same
time.
1030 Leveling Sequence Error - The leveling inputs were activated
in an invalid sequence.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 62 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1031 Selector setup error - The selector was not properly setup. • The incorrect number of leveling vanes was
detected
• A bad floor position setup
• The selector setup is incomplete
• Scanning the hatch too fast
1032 False slowdown interrupt - The slowdown interrupt was •
detected with no active slowdown input.
1033 Selector position error - The selector position is out of step •
with either the encoder, the slowdown, or the BP position.
1034 Expansion board error - The incorrect expansion board type • The wrong type of expansion board was installed
was returned. • A defective expansion board or cable
• An expansion cable was installed backwards
• An incorrect expansion board type adjustment
(see EIO adjustment)
1040 Door watchdog closing failure - The DCL input did not acti- • An incorrect D21 and/or D22 adjustment
vate within the expected time interval.
1041 Door watchdog opening failure - The DCL input did not acti- • An incorrect D21 and/or D22 adjustment
vate within the expected time interval.
1042 Viscosity shutdown (due to over temperature) - The OLTO
input is/was active.
1043 Low oil shutdown - The car did not complete a floor-to-floor
run within the low oil timer interval.
1044 Software error - Both inputs are in the required state to acti-
vate and de-activate Fire Service Phase 1 at the same time.
1045 Software error - Both inputs are in the required state to acti-
vate and de-activate Fire Service Phase 2 at the same time.
1046 Failed to add I/O to the hardware assignments list - An invalid
I/O name was found.
1047 Calls canceled due to service interruption.
1049 Open door protection failure - The doors failed to open in the • A defective I/O
allotted time. • A defective door operation
1050 Close door protection failure - The doors failed to close in the • A defective I/O
allotted time. • A defective door operation
1051 Stuck door opening device error - The SE, EE, DOB, or DHB I/ • A defective I/O
O is stuck in the active state. • A defective door operation
1052 Stuck DCB error - A DCB I/O is stuck in the active state. • A defective I/O
• A defective door operation
1053 The Fire Service Phase 1 secondary switch I/O does not • An invalid adjustment F16 for the fire service type
match the adjustment. • An invalid adjustment F15 for the secondary fire
service switch type
• The I/O provided does not match the require-
ments

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 63 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1054 Down run time has exceeded 5 minutes - The down run • A defective I/O
request was longer than the time allowed for a full hoistway • A defective valve adjustment
run in the down direction. • A defective valve
1055 The selector car position does not match with the BP sensors • A defective selector
at the floor level - The BP magnets exist, and are valid, but • Faulty or missing BP magnets
do not agree with the position reported by the selector.
1056 Floor tables of the encoder counts are not set up when • A defective hoistway scan
attempting an auto run. • A defective CPU
Note: When the elevator is not on inspection operation, and • A defective CPU battery
the level reference in non-volatile memory for any floor is • Loose battery connections
invalid. • An improper power unit setup
• Improper selector signals
• Verify Pnn and/or Mnn adjustments
1057 The encoder is out of tolerance at the floor level - The car is • A defective encoder
at floor level, and the encoder position count is different than
the floor position count by more than the value in adjustment
P20.
1059 Bad encoder re-calibration - Two (2) consecutive encoder re- • A defective encoder
calibrations were out of range.
Note: The encoder reported a count (while at two consecutive
floors) that was different from each floor position count by
more than adjustment P20.
1060 The selector setup was not completed - The selector setup • A defective CPU
either failed or was terminated before completion. • A defective selector
1061 Selector setup position count table error - The setup has • A defective selector
determined that a value for a floor was invalid, and the setup
is invalidated.
1062 1. Encoder interrupt failure - A car passed a slowdown • A defective encoder
point without receiving confirmation from the encoder. • Defective encoder wiring
Possible Solutions:
• Check the slowdown magnets for gaps
• Verify the P17 and/or P18 adjustments

2. Improper normal terminal slowdown magnet placement • The terminal slowdown (NTST input for top,
NTSB input for bottom) is reached too early
(before the corresponding selector slowdown is
reached). See P17 for top, and P18 for bottom.
• If the NTSB input deactivates (metered logic) at
the top terminal, or if the NTST input deacti-
vates (metered logic) at the bottom terminal:
• A 1086 error is generated
• A 1062 error is generated
• The car will run at slow speed to the next
stop
Possible Solutions:
• Check the slowdown magnets for gaps

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 64 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1067 Viscosity operation has detected activation of both low tem- • One or both sensors is out of adjustment
perature and high temperature sensors at the same time. • One or both sensors is defective
• Input wiring error
• A defective CPU card
1068 Dual post jack resync fault • See WJR command for details
1069 False power failure error - The CPU received a false NMI inter- • Electrical noise affecting the power fail detection
rupt, indicating an impending power failure, and the power signal and/or the power supply (check grounding
did not fail. and noise suppression)
• Power supply adjustment
• Defective power supply
• A defective CPU card
1070 LVU-LVD error - Neither of the LVU or the LVD leveling sensors • Defective selector sensors
were active while the car was within the door zone. • Improper wiring
Minimum requirements: • A defective CPU card
• One sensor active within the door zone
• Both sensors active at the floor level
1071 BLO does not match BLOM during CHKBLO test -
1073 Car/Gate door open limit error - A fault has been detected • A defective gate contact and/or door open limit
due to the simultaneous activation of the car gate contact • Improper wiring
and the door open limit. • Defective communication between the CPU card
and the electronic door operator
• A defective CPU card and/or electronic door oper-
ator
• A defective DOL or CDCF input
1074 Input PRSW Active (Pressure Switch) • Check I/O on IOD
1076 Freight door interlock stuck error - The freight door interlock • A defective interlock
(FDI) has failed to close at the start of a run, or failed to open • A defective retiring cam
at the end of a run. • Improper wiring
• A defective CPU card
1077 Loss of encoder pulse train error - While the car was in • A defective rotary encoder
motion, the encoder motion signal pulse train (furnished by • Defective tape motion sensors
either a tape or rotary encoder) was lost, and the elevator is • Improper wiring
shut down at a floor. • A defective CPU card
1078 Low battery error - The 3-volt battery in the CPU card is either • A dead battery
low or dead: • The battery is missing, or installed backwards
• This battery is required to ensure retention of job configu- • A defective CPU card
ration and adjustments.
• If the job configuration and adjustments are lost, then the
job configuration must be uploaded again from IMS.
• Elevator adjustments may have to be repeated, including
scanning the hoistway to learn the floor positions.
1079 Down run attempted but velocity stayed zero - The position • A defective position system (encoder/selector)
system specified determines the car velocity, and a down run • A car or jack is bound and not able to move
is attempted. If the velocity returned by the position system • The position system adjustment does not match
remains zero, assume that the car has stalled. the provided hardware

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 65 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1080 Bad group job data - The group software cannot run. Stored • An invalid configuration or adjustment
non-volatile data has invalid parameters in the group portion. • Corrupted memory: Install the previously down-
loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was generated previously by doing a Service /
Transfer / Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
• This error can also be generated by the following
information in the group memory:
• The number of floors = 0, or is greater than the
maximum number of floors permitted
• The number of cars in the group = 0, or is greater
than the maximum number of cars permitted
• The number of I/O = 0, or is greater than the
maximum number of I/O permitted
• Rear operation is specified, but there are no rear
openings specified
1081 Bad initialization of non-volatile memory - This fault can • Memory is temporarily unavailable - Reset the
occur if a new section of non-volatile memory is allocated by CPU
software, but the memory was not available at that time. • A software error
Note: This fault can also occur when updating software or • Corrupted memory - Install previously down-
performing an INIT or INIT ALL. The Remote FAST (if open) loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
will display which section of non-volatile memory failed. file was previously generated: Service>Trans-
fer>Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
1082 Bad save to non-volatile memory - This fault can occur if a • Memory is temporarily unavailable - Reset the
save to non-volatile memory is attempted by software but the CPU
memory was not available at that time. • A software error
Note: The Remote FAST (if open) will display which section of • Corrupted memory - Install previously down-
non-volatile memory failed. loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was previously generated: Service>Trans-
fer>Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card
1083 Bad recall of non-volatile memory - This fault can occur if: • Memory was temporarily unavailable - Reset the
• A recall from non-volatile memory is attempted by soft- CPU
ware, but the memory was not available at that time, or • A job image error - Check for incorrect TAG sizes
• If a memory segment is set to an invalid size, or through the WRT Remote FAST command
• If a variable is set out of its valid range. The Remote FAST • A job image error - Check for variables set incor-
(if open) will display which section of non-volatile memory rectly through the GET Remote FAST command
failed. • Corrupted memory - Install previously down-
loaded backup copy of non-volatile memory (this
file was previously generated: Service>Trans-
fer>Download from IMS)
• A bad CPU card

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 66 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1085 An SPI error has been detected on an CAN node. • For hall nodes - Use the DHN(F/R) command to
determine the HN node ID (the first failed node
will  display)
• For car nodes - Use the DCN command to deter-
mine the CN node ID (the first failed node will dis-
play)
• Check all wiring and connections at the failing
node
• Invalid configuration - See the DCN and DHN
commands and verify that the port numbers are
correct
• Issue the TECC command to make sure all of the
nodes are configured
• A bad CN, HN, or L24 board
1086 Normal terminal slowdown limit failure - This fault is normally • An invalid configuration or adjustment of mag-
caused by a sensor, a CPU input, or magnet failure of NTST, nets or selector
NTSB, TSR1, TSR2. • Corrupted memory - Install the prior downloaded
If the car is located at a Terminal Landing: backup copy of non-volatile memory (this file was
• The CPU inputs for that terminal did not drop out as previously generated: Service>Transfer>Down-
required to back up normal slowdown. The car is shut load from IMS)
down, with a service status of SELECTOR. • Bad sensors on TSMC
• The CPU inputs for the other terminal are not in the
proper state:
• A 1086 error is logged, but the car is not shutdown.
• A 1062 error will be generated (on the very next run
away from that terminal) and the car will run at slow
speed to the next stop.
If the car is located at the Bottom Terminal:
• Two consecutive failures of NTSB must occur before the
car is shut down, and a 1086 fault is generated with
each failure.
If the car is located at the Top Terminal:
• A single failure of NTST, TSL1, or TSL2 will cause the car
to shut down.
1088 Motor contactor Off - This fault occurs when the car does not • A stuck motor contactor auxiliary contact
have a run request, but the MCE input indicates that the • A defective MCE input
motor contactor was still enabled. • A bad CPU card
1089 The car gate and door locks made, but the door close limit • Faulty gate or locks
(DCL) was not activated. • Jumpers on the gate or locks
• A defective DCL or CDCF input
• Improper timing between the DCL and CDCF
inputs
1094 Hoistway access monitor failure - This fault occurs when
INHA and INHAM are in the same state.
1095 A dynamic sensor failed. • Check TPDL, TPDR
1100 Door bypass failure - This fault occurs when the bypass • A defective I/O (CDBM/HDBM)
switches are activated and car does not go on inspection • Improper wiring
operation. • A defective CPU card
1101 The front gate made, and DCL did not activate. • A defective I/O (CDCF, DCL, or CDCFM)

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 67 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1102 The rear gate made, and DCLR did not activate. • A defective I/O (CDCR, DCLR, or CDCRM)
1103 Door communication loss was detected. •
1104 Gate and lock error - The gate and lock circuit opened during • The car doors are clipping interlocks
a run. • A defective I/O (HDIF/HDIR)
• A defective gate contact
• Defective wiring
1105 Car door lock error - The car door did not close when DCL • A defective I/O (CDCF/CDCR or DCL)
was made. • A defective car gate contact
• Defective wiring
1107 Excessive leveling time that exceeds the hysteresis window
set by adjustment P22
1108 Start retry shutdown - The controller will shutdown after 6
consecutive attempts to start a run.
1110 A17/B44 shutdown error - Inspection to reset.
1111 Indicates that the seismic sensor has been activated.
1112 Indicates that the counterweight derailment sensor has been
activated.
1113 Car service protection is activated.
1115 The car failed to run because the door held.
1116 Ambient temperature out of range (-100C. to 700C.)
1121 SEL Node A CAN communication is offline
1122 SEL Node B CAN communication is offline
1123 Car top inspection Node A CAN communication is offline
1124 Car top inspection Node B CAN communication is offline
1125 HNB Node A top CAN communication is offline
1126 HNB Node A bottom CAN communication is offline
1127 HNB Node B top CAN communication is offline
1128 HNB Node B bottom CAN communication is offline
1129 SEL Node A/B data mismatch
1130 Car top inspection Nodes A/B data mismatch
1131 HNB top Nodes A/B data mismatch
1132 HNB bottom Nodes A/B data mismatch
1133 SEL Node A reported a duplicate node
1134 SEL Node B reported a duplicate node
1135 Car top inspection Node A reported a duplicate node
1136 Car top inspection Node B reported a duplicate node
1137 HNB top Node A reported a duplicate node

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 68 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1138 HNB bottom Node A reported a duplicate node
1139 HNB top Node B reported a duplicate node
1140 HNB bottom Node B reported a duplicate node
1141 SEL Node A data error
1142 SEL Node B data error
1143 Car top inspection Node A data error
1144 Car top inspection Node B data error
1145 MCE dropped during run - MCE went active at the start of a
run; During the run, a loss of MCE was detected.
1146 HNB top Node A data error
1147 HNB bottom Node A data error
1148 HNB top Node B data error
1149 HNB bottom Node B data error
1150 CWIL blown fuse
1501 MCD failed to open - A run sequence was started and was
waiting for MCD input to go active. The MCD input did not go
active at the start of a run.
1502 MCE dropped during run - MCE went active at the start of a
run, but during the run, a loss of MCE was detected.
1517 The Drive Temp OK Sensor (DTOK) has detected an over-
temperature condition on the IGBT’s.
1518 Digitizer Reset -
1520 The CANBus channel is turned Off.
1521 CAN Channel 1 did not communicate
1522 CAN Channel 2 did not communicate
1523 CAN Channel 3 did not communicate
1525 Bad fuse found on HN - A blown fuse has been detected on • Fuse F2 on the indicated HN board.
an HN board. Possible Solutions:
• In Remote FAST, type DHNF (or DHNR for rear ris-
ers) to determine if HN is causing the fault.
1526 CAN Channel 1 did not receive a message for 60 seconds.
1527 CAN Channel 2 did not receive a message for 60 seconds.
1528 CAN Channel 3 did not receive a message for 60 seconds.
1530 TSR overspeed detected - The monitoring input for the Fast • Use the TFR command to reset.
Valve Solenoid (UFSM) has been seen as active when the • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
selector/car is in a terminal floor zone and on the TSR tape matic.
magnet. The TSRCPU output is turned off, stopping all car
motion.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 69 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1531 Valve Input monitor failed - Valve monitoring inputs UFSM, • Use the TFR command to reset.
USSM, DFSM, or DSSM have been detected in the wrong • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
state (should always match their output counterparts UFS, matic.
USS, DFS, or DSS). The TSRCPU output is turned off, stop-
ping all car motion.
1532 TSR input monitor failed - The TSRM monitoring input does • Use the TFR command to reset.
not match the TSR output. The safety string is opened, stop- • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
ping all car motion. matic.
1533 FPGA detected door open outside of door zone - The safety • Use the TFR command to reset.
string is opened, stopping all car motion. • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
matic.
1534 FPGA detected an active fast valve solenoid (UFS or DFS out- • Use the CLR_FLT button to reset.
puts energized) when on hoistway access, inspection, or lev-
eling - The safety string is opened, stopping all car motion.
1535 FPGA detected invalid drive state - While on hoistway access • Use the CLR_FLT button to reset.
or inspection with no inspection Up/Down button active, or
while on door bypass with no controller/machine room
inspection Up/Down button active, the valve has been
detected as energized - The safety string is opened, stopping
all car motion.
1536 FPGA detected invalid door bypass - The car door bypass or • Use the TFR command to reset.
hoistway door bypass monitor inputs have been detected as • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
active when door bypass switches are off, or internal hoist- matic.
way access bypass terms are active when the hoistway
access switches are off - The safety string opened, stopping
all car motion.
1537 FPGA detected invalid door zone bypass - Internal door zone • Use the TFR command to reset.
bypass terms have been detected as active when the car is • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
not in the door zone - The safety string opens, stopping all matic.
car motion
1538 FPGA detected programming jumpers active - When IOD card • Remove the jumpers to restore operation.
jumpers JP2 or JP3 are placed in the 1-2 position to allow
CPU programming of the FPGA's, this fault registers and the
safety string opens.
1539 Safety processor system detected ambient temperature out • Resets when the detected temperature returns to
of range - The ambient temperature sensor on the IOD has the acceptable range.
reported the controller temperature to be outside the accept-
able range for continued operation (5°F to 167°F, or -15 °C to
75 °C). The safety string is opened, stopping all car motion.
1540 FPGA has opened the safety string via the SAFCPU output. • Check other existing associated fault codes.
1541 Motor starter monitor fault - The IO for starter control has • Use the TFR command to reset.
been detected in an invalid state. Either MCC1/MCC1M or • Cycle operation to inspection and back to auto-
MCC2/MCC2M are in unequal states. matic.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 70 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1687 CN no poll response - The inputs are cleared. • CN/HN has a safety critical I/O, and it did not
respond to the controller’s request. All I/Os on
that node are cleared.
Possible Solutions:
• Check power and communication to that node.
1688 HN no poll response - The inputs are cleared. • CN/HN has a safety critical I/O, and it did not
respond to the controller’s request. All I/Os on
that node are cleared.
Possible Solutions:
• Check power and communication to that node.
1689 Maximum safety nodes exceeded - The car was shutdown. • The job configuration has too many CN or HN
ports with safety I/Os on it.
Possible Solutions:
• Contact the factory.
1690 Invalid CN configuration - The job configuration has an • Contact the factory.
invalid CN configuration.
1691 Invalid message ID on Channel 1.
1692 Invalid message ID on Channel 2.
1693 Invalid message ID on Channel 3.
1705 End of run test failed circuits. • See FLT Message for details
1707 Rear selector vane set but I/O not present - P12>0, but is • Update job file appropriately
missing the rear selector input.
1850 Power disturbance detected on the P24 volt power supply. • Check the power supply for the proper current
rating
• Check grounds, etc.
1851 Hardware watchdog has occurred. • Noise issue
Possible Solutions:
• Verify that all suppressions are properly installed.
1852 Power loss interrupt failed (should never happen). • A hardware or software problem
Possible Solutions:
• Contact the factory
1853 Invalid MAC address - the ethernet port is disabled. • The factory did not properly set the MAC address
Possible Solutions:
• Contact the factory
1854 LU/LD stuck error. • Check the LU/LD inputs
1857 Software error - The system attempted to validate an I/O • Contact the Factory
prior to the I/O database being initialized (should never hap-
pen).
1858 Gate contact did not close.
1859 Discrete SPI HW failure - A CPUA or IOD hardware failure.
1861 The power-on self test failed - • Verify that the SAFC relay is functional

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 71 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1862 An invalid generic software version - The software version
does not match the job number. The car is shutdown until the
valid generic software is installed.
1865 A job file image is missing. • Update the job file
1866 Flash job file image is corrupted. • Update the job file
1867 The battery-backed RAM job file is corrupt. • Update the job file
1868 DZ1 is stuck active during a run. • Check DZ1
1869 DZ2 is stuck active during a run. • Check DZ2
1870 Stuck car call detected.
1920 Safety processor configuration invalid - At power-up, the
CPUA card detects an invalid IOD card safety processor con-
figuration. The SPC command will re-configure the safety
processor.
1921 Safety processor not online - At power-up, the CPUA did not • A defective CPUA
detect the IOD card safety processor communicating over the • A defective IOC
car CANbus.
1922 NP not online. • The IOD is bad
1925 SP I/O mismatch with CPUA. • Use the SPD command
1926 NP I/O mismatch with CPUA. • Contact the factory
1951 CDI fault.
3001 A destination call was lost because the car went out of ser-
vice.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 72 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Car Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1690 Invalid CN configuration - The job configuration has an • Contact the factory.
invalid CN configuration.
1691 Invalid message ID on Channel 1.
1692 Invalid message ID on Channel 2.
1693 Invalid message ID on Channel 3.
1705 End of run test failed circuits. • See FLT Message for details
1707 Rear selector vane set but I/O not present - P12>0, but is • Update job file appropriately
missing the rear selector input.
1850 Power disturbance detected on the P24 volt power supply. • Check the power supply for the proper current
rating
• Check grounds, etc.
1851 Hardware watchdog has occurred. • Noise issue
Possible Solutions:
• Verify that all suppressions are properly installed.
1852 Power loss interrupt failed (should never happen). • A hardware or software problem
Possible Solutions:
• Contact the factory
1853 Invalid MAC address - the ethernet port is disabled. • The factory did not properly set the MAC address
Possible Solutions:
• Contact the factory
1854 LU/LD stuck error. • Check the LU/LD inputs
1857 Software error - The system attempted to validate an I/O • Contact the Factory
prior to the I/O database being initialized (should never hap-
pen).
1858 Gate contact did not close.
1859 Discrete SPI HW failure - A CPUA or IOC hardware failure.
1861 The power-on self test failed - • Verify that the SAFC relay is functional
1862 An invalid generic software version - The software version
does not match the job number. The car is shutdown until the
valid generic software is installed.
1865 A job file image is missing. • Update the job file
1866 Flash job file image is corrupted. • Update the job file
1867 The battery-backed RAM job file is corrupt. • Update the job file
1868 DZ1 is stuck active during a run. • Check DZ1
1869 DZ2 is stuck active during a run. • Check DZ2
1870 Stuck car call detected.
1920 Safety processor configuration invalid - At power-up, the
CPUA card detects an invalid IOD card safety processor con-
figuration. The SPC command will re-configure the safety
processor.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 73 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Car Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes / Solutions

1921 Safety processor not online - At power-up, the CPUA did not • A defective CPUA
detect the IOD card safety processor communicating over the • A defective IOC
car CANbus.
1922 NP not online. • The IOD is bad
1925 SP I/O mismatch with CPUA. • Use the SPD command
1926 NP I/O mismatch with CPUA. • Contact the factory
1951 CDI fault.
3001 A destination call was lost because the car went out of ser-
vice.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 3 - 74 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting Section will be included in the next revision of this manual.
It will consist of flowcharts to identify and correct issues with the operation of the
TAC32 Controller.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 4-1 Printed in USA May, 2010

Troubleshooting TAC32 Controller

This page
intentionally
left blank.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 4-2 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Service Information

TAC32 Controller
Service Information

Warning

The following procedures are intended for the

use of qualified and authorized personnel only.
In the interest of your personal safety and the
safety of others, do NOT attempt any procedure
that you are not qualified and authorized to per-
form.
The procedures in this manual must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules
of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code; the latest edition of ASME A17.1; and any
governing local codes.

All drawings and information herein are the proprietary property of ThyssenKrupp Elevator and
are loaned subject to return on demand and must not be made public or copied, nor used,
directly or indirectly, in any manner detrimental to the interest of ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

Every attempt has been made to ensure that this manual is as accurate and up-to-date as pos-
sible. However, ThyssenKrupp Elevator assumes no liability for consequences resulting from
any error or omission. Please report any problems with this manual to the Technical Publica-
tions Department.

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-1 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Service Information

Introduction

The pages of the TAC32 Controller Service Information Procedures are identified as follows:

Introductory Pages: The section number (2), followed by a dash and a sequential capital letter. Example: 2-A.

Service Information Section: The section number (2) followed by a dash and a sequential page number. Example: 2-1.

Figures and Tables are identified in sequential order, Table 1, Table 2,...etc.

Revision Bars: Each revised page included in this manual will have a vertical line (change bar) to the left of the text that has been
added or changed. The example at the left of this paragraph shows the size and position of the revision change bar.

Each procedure should be read carefully and completely before starting that procedure. Give special attention to all Cautions and
Warnings; see the Safety Precautions section for details. Follow all procedures in the order written.

All test equipment, supplies, and parts should be on hand prior to starting the Service Information procedures. These should be
maintained in or near the machine room for future use.

ALL Standard Safety Precautions must be followed on the job site. See the Safety Precautions pertaining to TAC32 equipment.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-2 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions

IMPORTANT! Read this page before any work is performed on Elevator Equipment. The proce-
dures contained in this manual are intended for the use of qualified elevator person-
nel. In the interest of your personal safety and the safety of others, do not attempt
any procedure that you are not qualified to perform.
All procedures must be accomplished in accordance with the applicable rules in the latest edition of
the National Electrical Code, the latest edition of ASME A17.1, and any governing local codes.

Terms in This Manual

CAUTION statements identify conditions that may result in damage to the equip-
ment or other property if improper procedures are followed.

WARNING statements identify conditions that may result in personal injury if

improper procedures are followed.

General Safety
Before applying power to the controller, check that all factory wire connections are
tight on relays, contactors, fuse blocks, resistors, and terminals on cards and DIN
rail terminals. Connections loosened during shipment may cause damage or inter-
mittent operation.

Other specific warnings and cautions are found where applicable and do not appear in this sum-
mary. See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program Manual
and the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for electrical equipment safety infor-
mation on installation and service.

Electrical Safety All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be consistent with all state
and local codes.

Use the Proper Fuse

To avoid fire hazards, use only a fuse of the correct type, voltage, and current rating. See the job
specific drawings sheet (Power Supplies) for fusing information.
Electric shocks can cause personal injury or loss of life. Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses may
not disconnect all power to the equipment. Always refer to the wiring diagrams. Whether the AC
supply is grounded or not, high voltage will be present at many points.

Printed Circuit Cards

Printed circuit boards may be damaged if removed or installed in the circuit while applying power.
Before installation and/or removing printed circuit boards, secure all power.
Always store and ship printed circuit cards in separate static bags.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-3 Printed in USA May, 2010

Safety Precautions TAC32 Controller

Electrical Safety Mainline Disconnect

(continued)
Unless otherwise directed, always Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect to remove
power from elevator equipment. Before proceeding, confirm that the equipment is de-energized
with a volt meter. Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention
Program Manual for the required procedure.

Test Equipment Safety

Always refer to manufacturers’ instruction book for proper test equipment operation and adjust-
ments.
Megger or buzzer type continuity testers can damage electronic components. Connection of devices
such as voltmeters on certain low level analog circuits may degrade electronic system performance.
Always use a voltmeter with a minimum impedance of 1M Ohm/Volt. A digital voltmeter is recom-
mended.

When Power Is On

To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed electrical connections or components while power is
ON.

Mechanical Safety See the ThyssenKrupp Elevator Employees’ Safety and Accident Prevention Program Manual and
the Elevator Industry Field Employees’ Safety Handbook for mechanical equipment safety informa-
tion on installation and service.

Product Specific Warnings/Cautions

•
•
•

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-4 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Safety Precautions

Static Protection Guidelines

IMPORTANT! Read this page before working with electronic circuit boards.
Elevator control systems use a number of electronic cards to control various functions of the eleva-
tor. These cards have components that are extremely sensitive to static electricity and are suscepti-
ble to damage by static discharge.
Immediate and long-term operation of an electronic-based system depends upon the proper han-
dling and shipping of its cards. For this reason, the factory bases warranty decisions on the guide-
lines below.

Handling • Cards shipped from the factory in separate static bags must remain in the bags until time for
installation.
• Anti static protection devices, such as wrist straps with ground wire, are required when
handling circuit boards.
• Cards must not be placed on any surface without adequate static protection.
• Only handle circuit cards by their edges, and only after discharging personal static electricity to
a grounding source. DO NOT touch the components or traces on the circuit card.
• Extra care must be taken when handling individual, discrete components such as EPROMS
(which do not have circuit card traces and components for suppression).

Shipping • Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a static bag designed for the card.
• Any card returned to the factory must be packaged in a shipping carton designed for the card.
• “Peanuts” and styrofoam are unacceptable packing materials.
Note: Refer to the ThyssenKrupp Replacement Parts Catalog to order extra static bags and
shipping cartons for each card.

Failure to adhere to the above guidelines will VOID the card warranty!

Arrival of Equipment Receiving

Upon arrival of the equipment, inspect it for damage. Promptly report all visible damage to the car-
rier. All shipping damage claims must be filed with the carrier.

Storing

During storage in a warehouse or on the elevator job site, precautions should be taken to protect
the equipment from dust, dirt, moisture, and temperature extremes.

Revision Change Bars

Each revised page included in this manual will have a vertical line (change bar) to the left of the text
that has been added or changed. The example at the left of this paragraph shows the size and posi-
tion of the revision change bar.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-5 Printed in USA May, 2010

Safety Precautions TAC32 Controller

This page
intentionally
left blank.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-6 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Service Information

Contents
Page

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-09

Controller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-09
Power Panel - Electric Motor Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Power Panel - IEC Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Power Panel - Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Power Panel - Divider Panel Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Power Panel Parts List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Freight Door Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Fire Service Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Cabinet Assembly Repeater CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Swing Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

CAN System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

CAN Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Channel 2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Channel 3 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

CAN Distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

CAN Resistive Loading and Shield Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Car CAN Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Hoistway CAN Channel 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Hall CAN Link Resistive Loading (HC1H/L) WITH Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Hall CAN Link Resistive Loading (HC1H/L) WITHOUT Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

User Interface Tool (UIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

UIT Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Menu Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Adjustment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Real Time Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
System Clock Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Startup Wizard Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Selector Setup (Manual Hoistway Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Configure the Cars with the UIT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Command Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-7 Printed in USA May, 2010

TAC32 Controller Service Information

Contents
(continued)

Card Changing Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

UDC Door Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
CPUA 32-Bit Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
CN (CAN Node) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Serial PI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
L24 / S24-1 / S24-2 / S24-3 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
TSMC (SELB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
HN / HNB Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
CWIL Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

IMS Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
IOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
CPUA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
CAN Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
CN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
HN / HNB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
CWIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Adjust an Offline CAN Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
DHNF/ DHNR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
DCN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
CNN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Transformer Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Motor Data for Siemens Electronic Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

©2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-8 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Replacement Parts

TAC32 Service Information

Replacement Parts
Controller Assembly

Note: Typical controller assembly shown. See chart below for specific drawings and parts lists.

Item Assembly Illustration

Number Section Type and Parts List
1 Power Panel Electric Motor Starter Page 10
IEC Contactor Page 11
Single Phase Page 12
2 Divider Panel Detail Page 13

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5-9 Printed in USA May, 2010

Power Panel - Electric Motor Starter Service Information

Power Panel - Electric Motor Starter

7 19 17 9 8 18 14 16 20 21 22 23

2 1 5 10 13

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 10 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Power Panel - IEC Contactor

Power Panel - IEC Contactor

6 19 17 9 8 18 7 14 16 20 21 22 23

3 1 5 10 13

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 11 Printed in USA May, 2010

Power Panel - Single Phase Service Information

Power Panel - Single Phase

7 19 17 9 8 18 6 14 16 20 21 22 23

3 1 5 10 13

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 12 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Power Panel - Divider Panel Detail

Power Panel - Divider Panel Detail

11

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 13 Printed in USA May, 2010

Power Panel Parts List Service Information

Power Panel Parts List

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 298AR101 Contactor, IEC, in-the-line, 7.5 HP, 208-240V

298AR104 Contactor, IEC, in-the-line, 20 HP, 208-240V
298AR106 Contactor, IEC, in-the-line, 30 HP, 208-240V
2 298AG1 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 23A-43A
298AG2 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 69A-78A
298AG3 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 104A-157A
298AG4 Contactor, 3 Pole, IEC, 252A
3 690BB10 Relay, Overload, Series Curovl, 5.5-21A
690BB11 Relay, Overload, Series Curovl, 22-39A
690BB12 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 40-51A
690BB13 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 52-99A
690BB14 Relay, Overload, Series 48, 100-199A
4 787AF1 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 22A
787AF2 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 22A
787AF3 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 55A
787AF4 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 55A
787AF5 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 105A
787AF6 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 105A
787AF7 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 130A
787AF8 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 130A
787AF9 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 157A
787AF10 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 157A
787AF11 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 68A
787AF12 Starter, Electronic, 200-460V, 80A
787AF13 Starter, Electronic, 575V, 68A
787AF14 Starter, Electronic, 200-230V, 252A
5 672BW1 Power Supply, 24 VDC, 50 W.
672BX1 Power Supply, 24 VDC, 100 W.
672BY1 Power Supply, 24 VDC, 150 W.
672AY3 Power Supply, UPS, 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 300 VA
6 804BN1 Supressor Assembly, Transient
804BF1 Suppressor, Relay Contactor, Diode DC
890AJB Relay, Reverse Phase, 208-480 VAC
690 AJ7 Relay, Reverse Phase, 575 VAC

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 14 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Power Panel Parts List

Power Panel Parts List

(continued) ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION
7 874DA1 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz
874DA2 Transformer, PRI 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz
874DA4 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA,
1 Ph., 50/60Hz
874DA5 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz
874DA6 Transformer, PRI 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1 Ph.,
50Hz Only
874DB1 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115/115V, .75KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz
874DB2 Transformer, PRI 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1
Ph., 60Hz
874DB3 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz
874DC1 Transformer, PRI 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1
Ph., 50/60Hz
874DC3 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/
115V,.750KVA, 1 Ph., 50/60Hz
874DP1 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 115/115V, 1.0 KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz,
874DP2 Transformer, PRI 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, 1.0 KVA, 1
Ph., 60Hz,
874DP3 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 115/115V, 1.0 KVA, 1 Ph.,
60Hz,
874DW1 Transformer, PRI 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, 1.0 KVA, 1
Ph., 50/60Hz
874DW2 Transformer, PRI 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, 1.0
KVA, 1 Ph., 50/60Hz
874DEM001 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEM002 Transformer, PRI 230V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEM003 Transformer, PRI 480V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEM004 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 208V, .5KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEN001 Transformer, PRI 208V, SEC 208V, 1.0KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEN002 Transformer, PRI 230V, SEC 208V, 1.0KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEN003 Transformer, PRI 480V, SEC 208V, 1.0KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
874DEN004 Transformer, PRI 600V, SEC 208V, 1.0KVA, 1 Ph., 60Hz
8 690AJ7 Relay, RPR, SPDT, 575 VAC
690AJ8 Relay, RPR, SPDT, 208-480 VAC
9 412BE2 Fuse Block, Din Rail, 600V, 30A, 2 Pole
412BE3 Fuse Block, Din Rail, 600V, 30A, 3 Pole
10 6300ACJ1 Card, IOD
370AJ10 PCB Module - PSM P24 HP
11 6300ABY1 Card, Vista Monitoring, 32 Bit
12 6300PE1 Card, UIT, User Interface Tool (not shown)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 15 Printed in USA May, 2010

Power Panel Parts List Service Information

Power Panel Parts List

(continued) ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

13 6300PN1 Card, CE Microcom, Pre 2000 Fire Code

6300ACA1 Card, CE Microcom, Later Than 2000 Fire Code
14 672AY3 Power Supply, UPS, 115V, 60Hz, 600VA (not shown)
15 834CC9 Terminal Block, Rail, 180DEG, Gray
16 834CE1 Terminal Block, Rail, 180DEG, Green/Yellow W/GND
17 834CG1 Terminal Block, Rail, End Bracket
18 834DH1 Terminal Block, Rail, 16MM, Green/Yellow W/GND
19 558AX2 Ejector, Relay
20 770BK2 Relay Socket, Din Rail, DPDT
21 690CA3 Relay, 6A, 24V, DPDT
690CA5 Relay, 6A, 110V, DPDT
804CJ1 Relay, RT Series, DPDT, 115 VAC
409BP20 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 3A
409BP23 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 4A
409BP24 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 5A
409BP25 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 6A
409BP28 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 8A
409BP30 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 10A
409CW500 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 0.5A, Slow
409CW1000 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 1A, Slow
409CW2000 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 2A, Slow
409CW3000 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 3A, Slow
409CW4000 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 4A, Slow
409CW5000 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 5A, Slow
409CW6000 Fuse Panel, 2AG, 350V, 6A, Slow
409BR5 Fuse Panel, MDA, 1A
409BR7 Fuse Panel, MDA, 2A
409BR9 Fuse Panel, MDA, 3A
409BR10 Fuse Panel, MDA, 4A
409BR11 Fuse Panel, MDA, 5A
409BR12 Fuse Panel, MDA, 6A
409BR13 Fuse Panel, MDA, 7A
409BR14 Fuse Panel, MDA, 8A
409BR15 Fuse Panel, MDA, 10A

Wall Mounted Controller Material

22 265DX4 Unistrut 1-5/8” x 60”
23 72780 Unistrut Nut
24 396RW2 FS, Screw, CSBHS, 0.312-18UNC
25 196AWJ1 Controller Mounting Bracket

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 16 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Freight Door Cabinet

Freight Door Cabinet

3 2
2
4

11

9
14 .375”

10
.110”
Non-Locking

7
5

6 7 8 7

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 684AD14 DIN Rail, 11” Long

2 834BX1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail, 5.2mm Wide
3 834CA1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail
4 196XT1 Bracket, Card, Rail Mounted
5 6300VV1 Card, CAN Node (CN)
6 786BH3 Standoff, Card, Non-Locking, .156” X.187” X.375” Long
7 6300LN1 Card, LON High Voltage I/O
8 834AF2 End Section, Terminal Block, DIN Rail
9 834CD1 Partition, Terminal Block, DIN Rail
10 834BW1 Clamp, Terminal Block, DIN Rail
11 220DK600 Cable, Modular, CAT-5 8-8, 6” Long
12 220DK1 Cable, Modular, CAT-5 8-8, 6” Long
13 834AN5 Terminal Block, Panel, .312, 5-Position

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 17 Printed in USA May, 2010

Fire Service Cabinet Service Information

Fire Service Cabinet

2 3

13

4 5 11 12
6 7

10

1
.375”

9
.06“

8 Locking

12

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 9987643 804BV1 MOV, 80J, 150V

2 9782620 409BR7 Fuse, MDA, 250V, 2A
3 9912347 412AN1 Fuse block, 250V, 1 Position
4 9739464 804BC1 Contactor, RC, 110-230VAC
5 9782321 690CA3 Relay, PWR, DPDT, 6A, 24VDC
6 9815200 558AX2 Lever, Extraction, Relay
7 770BK1 Socket, Relay
8 834BW1 Clamp, Terminal Block, DIN Rail
9 834BX1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail, 5.2mm Wide
10 684AD10 DIN Rail, 6.75” Long
11 9782722 672BW1 Power Supply, 85-132VAC, 24VDC, 2.5A
12 786AX6 Standoff, PCB, Locking, .138” x .138” x .472” Long
13 9954715 834AN5 Terminal Block, Grounding, 5 Position

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 18 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Cabinet Assembly Repeater CAN

Cabinet Assembly Repeater CAN

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 834CF11 Terminal Block, Rail, End Plate

2 545AF2 Jumper, Terminal, 2-position
3 834CC9 Term Block, Rail, 180DEG, Gray
4 661BA6 Conn Term Plug/F 90DEG 5.08mm 1 x 6
5 580AEJ1 Marker Repeater CAN
6 370BC1 Module Repeater CAN
7 580TW1 Marker, Terminal Tag, 5MM x 10MM
8 834CX1 Term Block, Rail, Partition, Beige
9 101275 FS, Screw, SPTFS 0.164(#8)-32 x 0.375 Z
10 834CW1 Term Block, Rail, 180DEG, Pluggable, Beige
11 834CG1 Term Block, DIN Rail, End Bracket
12 684AD15 Rail, Component Mounting 6.000 Long
13 370BE1 Enclosure Drilled Repeater Can

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 19 Printed in USA May, 2010

Selector Service Information

Selector

1
2 9

8
6

5 4

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 6300ACK1 Card, Main Sensor, Tape Selector, TSMC
2 9841544 141549 Guide, Selector Tape
3 6300ACM1 Card, Auxiliary Sensor, Tape Selector, TSAC
4 760BF1 Shim, Aluminum, .093” x 1.25” x 5”
5 760BG1 Shim, Fiberglass, .093” x 1.25” x 5”
6 165RD1 Plate Nut Assembly
7 900AD60 Wire, 14GA., Green, #8 Rings, 10”
8 462VC001 Harness, Selector, Standard, CAN-BUS
462VC002 Harness, Selector, Extended, CAN-BUS
9 850PE1 Tool, Alignment, Magnet
10 814CH1 Template, Floor Magnets (not shown)
11 568AG2 Magnet Strip, 8.000 (not shown)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 20 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Swing Return

Swing Return

10

1
3 5

ITEM PART NO. PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION

1 6300ABT1 PCB Board, CWIL

2 141787 Standoff, Locking .375
3 6300VV1 PC Board, CN
4 6300LL3 PC Board, L24
5 6300ACY1 PC Board, S24-3
6 786BR2 Standoff, PCB Locking, Adhesive-backed (0.250”)
7 292JE207 CONN 7.5MM CAGC 7-position Blk/Yel Stripe (CWIL Board)
292JE204 CONN 5.08MM CAGC 4-position Blk/Yel Stripe (CWIL
Board)
292JD3 CONN 5.08MM CAGC 3-position Blk/Yel Stripe (CWIL
Board)
8 220DK1 Cable Assembly Modular CAR-5
220DK5 Cable Assembly Modular CAR-5 (CWIL to S24-3)
9 462NA1 Harness Jumper
10 672BW1 Power Supply, 23VDC 50W (PS1)
11 76813 Standoff

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 21 Printed in USA May, 2010

Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses Service Information

Replacement Parts -
Cards and Fuses
IOD Card (6300ACJ)

Fuse Part No. Description Designator

409CW6000 Fuse Panel 2AG 125V Slow 6.0A F_AC1A
409CW3000 Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 3.0A F_PS, F_P24GS, F_P24G
409CP3000 Fuse Panel 2AG 350V Fast 3.0A F_AC1SC
409AD7 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 1A F10
409AE9 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 2A F_P24
409CW500 Fuse Panel 2AG 125V Slow 0.50A F_AC1B, F_EP
409CW1000 Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 1.0A F_P24GS, F_P24G
409CW2000 Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 2.0A F_P24GS, F_P24G
409CW4000 Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 4.0A F_P24GS, F_P24G
409CW5000 Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 5.0A F_P24GS, F_P24G
409CW6000 Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 6.0A F_P24GS, F_P24G

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 22 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses

Replacement Parts -
Cards and Fuses
(continued)

CWIL Card (6300ABT1)

Fuse Part No. Description Designator

409CP500 Fuse Panel 2AG 350V FAST 0.50A F_AC1SB
409AE9 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 2A F_P24M
409AE11 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 3A F_BAT, F_P24A
409AE13 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 4A F_P24CF, F_P24CR
409AE5 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 0.5A F_P24L

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 23 Printed in USA May, 2010

Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses Service Information

Replacement Parts -
Cards and Fuses
(continued) HNB Card (6300ACE1)

Fuse Part No. Description Designator

409AE5 PCB PICO 125V 0.50A F1, F2

HN Card (6300VR1)

Fuse Part No. Description Designator

409AE5 PCB PICO 125V 0.50A F1, F2

TSAC Card (6300ACM1)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 24 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses

Replacement Parts -
Cards and Fuses
(continued)

TSMC Card (6300ACK)

Fuse Part No. Description Designator

409AE7 PCB PCIO 125V 1A F1

L24 Card (6300LL)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 25 Printed in USA May, 2010

Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses Service Information

Replacement Parts -
Cards and Fuses
(continued)

S24 -1 Card (6300VC)

S24-2 Card ( 6300VL)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 26 Printed in USA May, 2010

 Service Information Replacement Parts - Cards and Fuses

Replacement Parts -
Cards and Fuses
(continued) S24-3 Card (6300ACY1)

CPUA Card (6300XE1)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 27 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN System Overview Service Information

CAN System Overview

The CPUA Card, mounted on the IOD Card, controls the functions of the elevator. This assembly
regulates two types of I/O:

1. Discrete I/O (includes 24VDC spares that may be configured for up to 19 active low I/O).

2. Distributed CAN I/O.

Note: The remaining connections around the perimeter of the IOD Card are dedicated I/O
(labeled on the card for identification).

CAN Channels The CPU sends and receives signals through a twisted shielded pair via two (2) CAN Channels. See
Figure 1 on page 29.

Channel 2 Cards
• CWIL - located in the swing return (main COP I/O)
• CN - located in the auxiliary swings (contract specific)
• UDC - located in the door operator(s) and provides both send and receive data to the CPU
• Selector - located in the CAN selector

Channel 3 Cards
• HNB, HN, and CN (for group/car I/O)
• Car-to-car CAN cross-connection cards

Channel 2 Cards CWIL Cards

The CWIL (Car Wiring Interface L) Card is located in the swing of the main car station, and is the
traveling cable interface between the controller and the car devices. The card is the car safety cir-
cuit interface as well as a safety node (with twin ARM7 32bit micros, hoistway enable, and car top
inspection). Through the TECC Command, each node is taught its function and I/O assignments.

This card contains:

• The CN function
• A battery charger (to maintain the car emergency lighting battery)
• An RS232 port for IMS
• A 16-signal active low I/O port with S24-1 SPI Loop capability. If an SPI Loop error occurs
(indicated by a 1085 fault), it will only be registered once. This action will prevent multiple
1085 faults from preventing the display of other faults.
Note: To identify the CN causing the fault, use the DCN Command.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 28 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information CAN System Overview

CAN System
Overview
(continued)

Figure 1 - Block Diagram of CAN Channels 2 and 3

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 29 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN System Overview Service Information

Channel 2 Cards
(continued) Selector Cards
The TSMC and TSAC Cards use a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) for sensor checking and
verification, an IR LED pulsing control, and two NXP ARM7 32bit microprocessors.The floor count is
calculated onboard and sent to the CPUa in CAN messages along with all selector sensor data.This
selector is also considered a safety node.
Located at each terminal, each floor -
• Front of the tape: 8" leveling magnets
• Back of the tape: Directional limit magnets and terminal slowdown magnets

All magnets (except the Top Terminal NTSD, see Magnet Placement Adjustment Section ) show
their south polarity (yellow stripe) side outward.
Also included are two tracks for dual selector leveling, and door zone magnets for close landing
jobs using one selector box.

L24 and S24 Cards

Each of the L24 and S24 Cards have the capability to support eight-bit ports of I/O. The ports of
these cards send signals from a car or hoistway device to the CN or HN nodes.
The S24-3 Card is similar to the S24-1 and S24-2 Cards, and contains both MTA and screw-type
connectors with power and ground available at all ports. There are five 8-bit ports available.

Serial PI Card
The Serial PI Card (shown below) receives RS485 communication (provided by either the HN or the
CN Card) and displays the floor position data in the car, hoistway, or lobby panel for each job spec-
ification.

Connecting serial communication to CON1 will result in damage to the Serial PI

Card.

CON1 STAT P5V CON2

(Status) (5VDC

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 30 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information CAN System Overview

Serial PI Card
(continued)

Serial PI Card CAN Serial PI Card Jumper Locations

Communication Mode Jumper Position Description
Elevator JP6 JP5 JP4 JP1 Off PI not at main landing
Car 1 Off Off Off On PI at main landing to flash display on Fire Service
Car 2 Off Off On JP2 Off PI defined as for master car on HN
Car 3 Off On Off PI defined as shared car on HN
Car 4 Off On On On Note: On only for the PI connected to CON10 PI-B
Car 5 On Off Off on the HN card (e.g., the second car)

Car 6 On Off On JP3 Off Scrolling arrows off

Car 7 On On Off On Scrolling arrows on

Car 8 On On On JP7 Off Default

Note: JP7 must be in the ON position On Lobby panels only

JP10 Off RS485 Termination resistor disabled
On RS485 Termination resistor enabled
JP11 Off CAN Shield not connected
1-2 CAN Shield connected to GND
2-3 CAN Shield connected to chassis
JP12 Off CAN Shield not connected
1-2 CAN Shield connected to GND or chassis directly
CAN Shield Capacitor connected to GND or chassis
2-3
through.01 μF capacitor
JP13 Off CAN split termination not connected
1-2 CAN split termination connected to GND
2-3 CAN split termination connected to chassis

RJ45 CAT5 Connector Wiring

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 31 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN System Overview Service Information

Serial PI Card
(continued) Breakout Cards

The 6300WG Breakout Card (shown right)

provides discrete wire interface to an RJ11
port for further connection to an HN Card in
the hoistway duct.
This card allows the interface of both Up
and Down hall calls, chime, or lanterns.
An LED indicates 24VDC power.
LED

LED
The 6300WF Breakout Card (shown right)
provides connections for conventional hall
call devices.

An LED indicates 24VDC power.

Channel 3 Cards HNB and HN Cards

HNB Card - This card functions as a safety node at the floors where there is a Hoistway Access
Switch, (all other floors use the standard HN Card). The HNB Card adds the twin NXP ARM7 micro-
processors (replacing the original PIC micro) and redundant HWAC I/O hardware circuits to the stan-
dard HN design.

HN Card - HN Cards have the capability to interface with lanterns, PI’s, hall calls, fire service, and
hoistway access for up to 2 cars on either front or rear door applications. Typically, there are 2 HN
Cards on each floor for a front / rear application. On front-only applications, 1 HN Card is used for
each floor.
HN Cards can manage up to 16 external I/O Cards (when the on-card ports are not used). However,
the number of HN Cards is limited by the power sources and the software configuration. All of the
HN nodes’ CAN communication, power, and teach lines are in-parallel from HN to HN.

A maximum of two cars may be assigned to a common duct (including front, rear, or both applica-
tions in one common). If two cars share the duct, one must be assigned as the master car and the
other as the slave car (the common duct contains HN nodes that are assigned to each floor of a
particular installation).

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 32 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information CAN System Overview

Channel 3 Cards
(continued)
HN Card (continued)
The terminal floor HN Cards have a small SPI Loop with an installed S24-2 Card (to facilitate hoist-
way access for up to two cars). If an SPI Loop error occurs (indicated by a 1085 fault), it will only be
registered once. This action will prevent multiple 1085 faults from preventing the display of other
faults. Note: To identify which HN is causing the fault, use the DHNF/R command.
Should an HN Card fail, only the fixtures for that particular floor opening are affected; when both a
front and rear HN are located at a given floor, the only fixtures affected would be the ones associ-
ated with the failed HN.

CN Card
CN Cards have the capability to assign car calls, PI’s, hoistway access, and other distributed I/O
associated with the main COP. Associated with auxiliary COP's, this card functions as a smart node
that maintains an assigned I/O configuration.
Up to 12 CN Cards may operate on a TAC32 System, and each card can manage up to 16 external
I/O Cards when the on-card ports are not used.
Through the TECC Command, each node is taught its function and I/O assignments. The CN Card
sends and receives I/O status changes to the CPU Card.The cards are addressed using jumpers,
and additional addresses are required when CN Cards are used on Channel 3.
The CN Card supports an SPI Loop and must be correctly configured for on-card, off-card, or both
on and off card ports (subject to the job configuration). Other CN Card applications include freight
box, security, and lobby panel distributed I/O.

CN Card Node (Channel 3) CN Auxiliary Jumper Settings

Group Addressing Jumper Position Description
JP3 JP2 JP1 JP8 JP9 ON Enables on-card port SPI I/O.
CAR 1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Disables on-card port SPI I/O. Off-card SPI I/O
CAR 2 OFF OFF ON ON only.
CAR 3 OFF ON OFF ON JP10 1 to 2 Provisional programming jumper.
CAR 4 OFF ON ON ON 2 to 3 N/A
CAR 5 ON OFF OFF ON JP11 1 to 2 Connects the CAN communication shield wiring to
CAR 6 ON OFF ON ON digital ground reference.
CAR 7 ON ON OFF ON 2 to 3 Connects the CAN communication shield wiring to
chassis ground reference.
CAR 8 ON ON ON ON
COMMON CN OFF OFF OFF OFF
JP12 1 to 2 Connects the CAN communication shield wiring
bypassing split capacitor.
2 to 3 Connects the CAN communication shield wiring to
split capacitor.
JP13 1 to 2 Connects the CAN communication split capacitor
to digital ground reference.
2 to 3 Connects the CAN communication split capacitor
to chassis ground reference.
JP14 1 to 2 Normal operation.
2 to 3 For programming and uploading software.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 33 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN Distributed I/O Service Information

CAN Distributed I/O

In the TAC32 System, there are several common circuit cards (nodes) that comprise the CAN
Distributed I/O System:
• CWIL (COP node)
• CN (AUX and Rear COP node)
• HN and HNB (Hoistway node)

The CPUA communicates with these I/O nodes on CAN channels within the controller system.
• CAN Channel 2, is the car-specific channel and is assigned all distributed car-specific I/O.
• CAN Channel 3 is assigned all of the group and hoistway-specific distributed I/O.

CAN Resistive To ensure that the CAN Channels for the car and the hoistway communicate with minimum errors
Loading and Shield and maximum efficiency, the CAN nodes for each channel must have properly configured shields
Configurations and resistive loading. Failure to establish these configurations may result in erratic or intermittent
CAN node communication, and the connected fixtures may function intermittently or not at all.

Car CAN Channel 2 Note: See Figure 2 and Figure 3 on page 35 for details/images for this section.
Verify the following areas to ensure that Car Channel 2 is properly shielded and resistive loaded:
1. Car CAN Link Shield Configuration is fixed (shield grounded on the CWIL Card).
2. Car CAN Link Resistive Loading Configuration.
Note: CCH/CCL is resistor-terminated at both ends:
• On CPUA via the CCC/CCT jumpers
• On CWIL by fixed resistor R65

Disable Termination at the UDC Card Resistor Locations,

Disable Termination at all CN Cards (front and rear doors)
Connected to CCH/CCL • Remove Resistors R105 and R106

Figure 2 - Car CAN Channel 2 Link Resistive Loading and Shield Configurations (1 of 2)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 34 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information CAN Distributed I/O

Car CAN Channel 2

(continued)

Disable Shield at the Selector

• Remove JP2

Enable Termination on the CPUA Card

• Jumper CCC = ON
• Jumper CCT = ON

Figure 3 - Car CAN Channel 2 Link Resistive Loading and Shield Configurations (2 of 2)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 35 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN Distributed I/O Service Information

Hoistway CAN
Channel 3 Hoistway CAN Channel 3 can be complex depending on how many cars and how many risers are
involved in the final installation. Failure to properly shield and resistive load this channel will result in
excessive CAN communication errors.

Results from excessive CAN communication errors:

• Prevents other CAN commands such as TECCR, TECF/R, and TECC from functioning cor-
rectly.
• Prohibits the use of the Can Loader Tool.
• Causes intermittent operation of the hoistway devices attached to the hoistway CAN
nodes.

On any installation having only one riser, CAN Repeaters will not be required. However, on all instal-
lations that have more than one riser in the group, an individual repeater for each and all risers
within that group is required.

CAN Channel 3
HC1H/L With
Repeaters Verify the following areas to ensure that CAN Channel 3 is properly shielded and resistive loaded for
optimum communication:

• Hall CAN Link Shield Configuration is fixed (shield grounded on the IOD Card).
• Hall CAN Link Resistive Loading (HC1H/HC1L) without Repeaters.
Note: HC1H/L is terminated at both ends. See Figure 4.
By the resistor plug at CON3 of the last/bottom HNB.
By HC1T/HC1C jumpers on the CPUA Card of the controller, where the HN Riser is
connected, or its CAN Repeater.

Figure 4 - HN Card Jumper Locations

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 36 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information CAN Distributed I/O

CAN Channel 3
HC1H/L With
Repeaters
(continued) 1. Enable shield grounding on HNB at end of the HN riser. See Figure 5 and Figure 6 on page 38,
and Figure 7 on page 39.
• Install jumper JP10 1-2
• Install jumper JP11 1-2

2. Disable shield grounding on all other HN's.

• Remove JP10 and JP11

3. Disable shield grounding at all CN's connected to HC1H/L (if present).

• Remove JP11 and JP12

4. Disable shield grounding at all PI B's if connected to HC1H/L.

• Remove JP11 and JP12

5. Enable termination at the CPUA on the controller connected to and feeding the CAN Repeater/
HN riser cable.
• Install jumpers HCIC and HCIT

6. Disable termination on CPUA at all other controllers.

• Remove jumpers HCIC and HCIT

7. Enable repeater termination.

• Place the CAN 0 “B” termination jumper and the CAN 1 “A” termination jumper in the
enabled position.

8. Enable termination on the HNB at the bottom end of the HN riser.

• Insert plug with 120 Ohm resistor into the end of HNB CON3.

9. Disable termination at all CN’s connected to HC1H/HC1L (if present).

• Remove R20 and R21
• Remove jumper JP13

10. Disable termination at all PI B's that are connected to HC1H/L.

• Remove R29 and R30
• Remove jumper JP13

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 37 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN Distributed I/O Service Information

CAN Channel 3 HC1H/L

With Repeaters
(continued)

Figure 5 - CAN Channel 3 HC1H/HC1L With Repeaters

Figure 6 - CANbus Termination - TAC32 Duplex Group, One HN Riser with a CAN Repeater

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 38 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information CAN Distributed I/O

CAN Channel 3
HC1H/L With
Repeaters
(continued)

Figure 7 - CANbus Termination - TAC32 Four-Car Group, Two HN Risers with CAN Repeaters

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 39 Printed in USA May, 2010

CAN Distributed I/O Service Information

CAN Channel 3
HC1H/L Without
Repeaters 1. Enable shield grounding on HNB at end of the HN riser. See Figure 8.
• Install jumper JP10 1-2
• Install jumper JP11 1-2
2. Disable shield grounding on all other HN's.
• Remove JP10 and JP11
3. Disable shield grounding at all CN's connected to HC1H/L (if present).
• Remove JP11 and JP12
4. Disable shield grounding at all PI B's if connected to HC1H/L.
• Remove JP11 and JP12
5. Enable termination at the CPUA on the controller connected to HN riser cable.
• Install jumper, HCIC, and HCIT
6. Enable termination at end of HN riser.
• Insert plug with 120 Ohm resistor into the end of HNB CON3 (OUT) (bottom of riser).
7. Disable termination on CPUA at all other controllers.
• Remove jumper HCIC and HCIT
8. Disable termination at all CN's connected to HC1H/L (if present).
• Remove R20 and R21
• Remove Jumper JP13
9. Disable termination at all PI B's that are connected to HC1H/L.
• Remove R29 and R30
• Remover Jumper JP13

CANbus Termination
TAC32 Simplex with one HN Riser
(No CAN Repeater Required)

Figure 8 - CAN Channel 3 HC1H/L Without Repeaters

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 40 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information User Interface Tool (UIT)

User Interface Tool (UIT)

UIT Menu Tree

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 41 Printed in USA May, 2010

User Interface Tool (UIT) Service Information

User Interface Tool

(UIT)
(continued) The User InterfaceTool (UIT) is an embedded diagnostics and service tool allowing a qualified
mechanic to commission and troubleshoot a TAC32 Controller. It can be used to meet the
requirements of a non-proprietary diagnostic tool.
Note: This UIT is job specific, and may not be installed on another TAC32 controller without
the job configuration file.

Menu Selection Access The Menu Selection Screen

Screen 1. Press any button while ThyssenKrupp Elevator is displayed in the UIT window.
2. Enter the pin number - 1234144. See Figure 9.
Note: If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press the UP button until
ThyssenKruppElevator appears in the window, then re-enter the code.

1 2 3 4

The numbers on the buttons above are for illustration

and are not printed on the actual UIT.

Figure 9 - UIT Main Menu Screen

There are four main menu blocks (each having several submenus) on the UIT.
1. Adjustments Block
2. Real Time Block
3. Clock Block
4. Startup Wizard Block
Notes:
• To access the main menu blocks use the UP and DN arrow buttons to scroll to the
desired section, then press ENTER.
• To return to one of the four main menu blocks, press ESC.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 42 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information User Interface Tool (UIT)

Adjustment Block ADJUSTMENTS MENU

This menu displays and modifies all car and group adjustments within the categories listed below.
Notes:
• A description of the adjustment is displayed along with the units.
• The adjustment is scaled per the units.
• The need for the user to know the scaling is no longer required.
• Example: D14 = 1.1 (sec) Safety Edge Door Time.

Job Coded Car Calls Options 1

Code Blue Destination Dispatch Options 2

Group Dispatch Doors Parking and Zoning

Emergency Power Fire Service Traffic Reporting

Fixtures Homing Position

Information Motion Security

Inconspicuous Riser

Access the Adjustments Menus

1. Scroll to Adjust Menu -> ENTER

2. UP or DN (to desired menu) -> ENTER

3. UP or DN (to desired adjustment)

4. Press ENTER (to go into edit mode)

COMMANDS MENU
Commands are located in one of four categories:

1. Commands-Common-FCP - A set of commands required to service the control system. A

description of each command is provided.

2. Commands-Upload - A set of commands required to upload ARM software to peripherals (UFW

commands) and save the car image to the USB stick (UDLS).
Example Readout
UFWCWF - Upload CWIL firmware
10% complete

3. Commands-Startup - A set of commands required to either commission a car for turnover or to

perform yearly maintenance.

4. Commands-Group - A set of commands to set up the embedded 32bit group.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 43 Printed in USA May, 2010

User Interface Tool (UIT) Service Information

Adjustment Block
(continued) UNIVERSAL DOOR CONTROLLER MENU
Note: See the Universal Door Operator component manual for adjustment procedures.

Commands are located in one of these categories:

1. UDC Front Door - View and edit all adjustments under this door type including submenus for:
Monitor, Command, Control, Door, System, Profile 1, Profile 2, Profile 3, Profile 4, Profile 5.

2. UDC Rear Door - Same as Front Door.

Real Time Block Real Time Screens

1. Motion Screen
2. Status Screen
3. Arbiter Screen
4. Position Screen

Quick Button Access from any Real Time Screen

From any screen in the Real Time Menu, the Quick Commands Buttons allow easy access to
the list of functions below:

• Show Faults
• Reset Faults
• Reset Run Faults
• Register Front Car Call
• Register Rear Car Call
• Register Front Up Hall Call
• Register Front Down Hall Call
• Show Stable Leveling Distance
• Show I/O

Notes:
• Once the action has been taken, the screen automatically reverts to the previously
selected Real Time Screen, which allows the adjuster to inject an action and then see
the response without having to manually maneuver the screens.
• Press ENTER at any time while in the Real Time Menu to access the Quick Commands
Menu.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 44 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information User Interface Tool (UIT)

Real Time Block

(continued) MOTION SCREEN
This screen dynamically re-configures its display based on the current status of the car. The data
includes:
• Car Position
• Car Speed
• Doors (Open, Closing, Opening, Ajar)
• Level
• Fault Indication
• Car Service
• Group Service
• Car dpp Count
• Floor Ref dpp Count

STATUS SCREEN
This screen displays the status of the CAN sub-systems including CN, CWIL, HN, HNB, SELB, and
UDC.
The configuration of HN’s and CN’s is verified; if not configured properly, a status of the failure is
indicated.

ARBITER SCREEN
Shows the service and any feature requesting service of the following:
Motion, Calls, Front Door, Rear Door, Seed, and Lockouts

POSITION SCREEN
This screen displays a simple view of the car position and the car speed. This is the only screen
accessible without a valid password.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 45 Printed in USA May, 2010

User Interface Tool (UIT) Service Information

System Clock Block This menu sets the time and date. If the time or date needs to be changed, the UIT displays a
prompt.
Note: Time is 0-24 hours.

Startup Wizard Block This menu walks the adjuster through the steps needed to bring up a car in a proper, logical
sequence.
Note: Upon entering this menu, a prompt (Select Yes or No to Start the Wizard) appears.

STARTUP WIZARD STEPS

1. Teach Direction Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top

2. Clear HN

3. Teach Front HN

4. Teach Rear HN

5. Config HN and CN

6. Verify all CN's

7. Verify Front HN Config

8. Verify Rear HN Config

9. Auto Hoistway Scan

10. Write to Flash

11. Save Job to USB

Selector Setup Perform a Hoistway Scan

(Manual Hoistway Use the Automatic Hoistway Scan Command located on the Start Wizard Menu. If this method
Scan) fails, correct the problem based on the UIT feedback, and repeat the Automatic Hoistway Scan.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 46 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information User Interface Tool (UIT)

Configure the Cars

with the UIT Screen

During construction, it may be necessary to make the slave car of the duct into a master car
because the lower cars in the group may be the first to be adjusted. If so, the DHNM Command
must be used along with the commands in this section to get the HN boards found and configured.

Command Sequence Recommended Command Sequence

1. DHNM - Identifies and sets the HN master and slave cars

2. TECF or TECR - Teaches the HN nodes on the specified hall riser (front or rear)

3. TECCR - Erases configurations on all nodes

4. TECC - Loads I/O configurations on all nodes

5. DCN - Displays the status of all CN Boards

6. DHNF or DHNR - Displays the status of all HN boards on the specified riser (front or rear)

Command 1 - DHNM

The DHNM Command identifies which of the two cars sharing a common duct is the master car of
that duct. The duct includes the shared HN boards for a either a Simplex or Duplex (pair of cars
within a group) Application. See Figure 10 and Figure 11 on page 48.

Notes:
• Only the master car of the duct can teach the HN boards in its duct. The master car will
also permit the TECF or TECR Commands that are required to identify the HN’s in the duct.
• Simplex Application - The car will always be the master car.
• Duplex Application - Either car may be the master car, but the remaining car must be the
slave car of the shared duct.
• If there are 3 or more cars in the group, there will be a duct for the additional car or pair of
cars in the group.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 47 Printed in USA May, 2010

User Interface Tool (UIT) Service Information

Command Sequence
(continued)

DHNM - HN Master Slave

UP: Next DN: Prev

Figure 10 - DHNM Command (Display 1)

DHNM - This car:1 is Master,

sharing the riser with car:2
UP:Next DN:Prev

Figure 11 - DHNM Command (Display 2 appears after DHNM Enter)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 48 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information User Interface Tool (UIT)

Command Sequence
(continued)
Command 2 - TECF or TECR
The TECF or TECR Command sends out a signal to identify the HN boards that are com-
municating on Hall Channel 3, and the UIT displays the results.

Notes:
• The TECB Command allows the TECF or TECR Command to identify the HN
boards from the bottom up, or toggle on basement machine applications to teach
in the opposite direction.
• The HNs must be taught in the order they are wired. Default: HNs are wired and
taught from the top down. If the HNs are wired from the bottom up, the TECB
Command must be used in addition to TECF or TECR.

Command 3 - TECCR
The TECCR Command resets all of the CAN nodes to a generic default. SeeFigure 12
below, and Figure 13 on page 50.
Note: Use this command before the TECC command.

TECCR -
Complete, Now must TECC this car
and car 2.

Figure 12 - TECCR Command

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 49 Printed in USA May, 2010

User Interface Tool (UIT) Service Information

Command Sequence
(continued) Command 4 - TECC
The TECC Command configures all CAN nodes.

TECCR - Config Reset HN/CN

UP: Next DN: Prev

Figure 13 - TECC Command (appears after TECCR ENTER)

Command 5 - DCN
The DCN Command displays the following information. See Figure 14 and Figure 15 on
page 51.
• The status of the CWIL and CN boards located on either Channel 2 or Channel 3.
• Specific CN data:
• Communication status
• Node ID
• The number of ports assigned
• The specific ports assigned

Executing the DCN Command prompts the user to enter specific parameters, and the
requested data appears in the UIT window.
CN Node=0
UP:+ DN:-
Ping a Port?
UP:Yes DN:No
CN:0 CWIL----Online:1 Pcks:225 Ch:2 V:8 uPLPC23xx SP:0 TP:7
Ports: 19,20,21,22,23,24,25
Note: If a line is scrolling, press UP to pause the screen and then press UP to
resume scrolling.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 50 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information User Interface Tool (UIT)

Command Sequence
(continued)

DCN - Display Stats

UP:Next DN:Prev
Need Screen Shot

Figure 14 - DCN Command (Display 1)

Enter specific information here.

Need Screen Shot

Figure 15- DCN Command

(Display 2 appears after DCN Enter)

Command 6 - DHNF or DHNR

The DHNF or DHNR Commands display the HN boards assigned to a front (DHNF) or
rear (DHFNR) riser, the status of the HN, and its logical floor assignment and porting.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 51 Printed in USA May, 2010

Card Changing Procedures Service Information

Software Management
To Archive the Generic Software and the Job Image: Place a USB memory stick into the
CPUA slot of the car, and issue a ULDS command in the UIT: ADJUST -> Commands ->
Upload -> UDLS.

To Upload Software Updates to the ARM Devices: Place the software file (located on the USB
stick) in the update directory, and use the following UIT commands: ADJUST -> Commands ->
Upload ->

UFWCNF CN file CN.VxRx

UFWCWF CWIL file CW.Vxx
UFWSLF SELB file SL.Vxx
USWHNBF HNB file HNB.VxRx
UFWHNF HN file HN.VxRx
UFWSPF Safety Processor file SPH.VxRx
UFWNPF NTSD Processor file NP.VxRx

Card Changing Procedures

UDC Door Card See the appropriate Door Operator Manual.

CPUA 32-Bit Card See the CPUA 32-Bit Manual.

CN (CAN Node) Card 1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Note locations, then remove all wires and MTA connectors from the old CN Card.

4. Take out the old CN Card.

5. Place the jumpers in the same positions as on the old card.

6. Install the replacement CN Card.

7. Install all wires and MTA connectors on the new card.

8. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

9. Log on to the UIT using the PIN number (1234144). See the UIT Menu Tree.

10. Navigate to the Adjustments Block -> COMMANDS STARTUP menu.

11. Enter the TECC Command.

12. Enter the DCN Command (to confirm communication and port assignments).

13. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 52 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information Card Changing Procedures

Card Changing
Procedures
(continued)
Serial PI Card 1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Note locations, and remove all wires from the old Serial PI Card.

4. Take out the old Serial PI Card.

5. Place the jumpers in the same positions as on the old card.

6. Install the replacement Serial PI Card.

7. Install all wires and connectors on the new card.

8. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

9. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.

L24/S24-1/S24-1/ L24 Cards have no software and can be used where needed.
S24-3 Cards
1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Note locations, and remove all wires and MTA connectors from the L24/S24-1/S24-2/S24-3
Card.

4. Install the replacement L24/S24-1/S24-2/S24-3 Card.

5. Install all wires and connectors on the new card.

6. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

7. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.

TSMC (SELB) Card 1. See the Installation Section for the proper selector.

2. Log on to the UIT using the PIN number (1234144). See the UIT Menu Tree.

3. Navigate to STARTUP WIZARD BLOCK.

4. Place the car on Automatic Service.

5. Activate the Door Disconnect Switch on the IOD.

6. Press the UP button until “Auto Hoistway Scan?” appears, and then press the Enter button.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 53 Printed in USA May, 2010

Card Changing Procedures Service Information

Card Changing
Procedures
(continued)
HN / HNB Card 1. Note locations, then remove all wires and connectors from the old HN or HNB Card.

2. Take out the old card.

3. Place the jumpers in the same positions as on the old HN Card (no jumpers for HNB).

4. Install the replacement card.

5. Install all wires and connectors on the new card.

6. Log on to the UIT using the PIN number (1234144). See the UIT Menu Tree.

7. Navigate to the Adjustments Block -> COMMANDS STARTUP menu.

8. Enter the TECCR Command to clear any previous configuration information stored.

9. Enter the TECF (front riser) or TECR (rear riser) Command.

10. Enter the TECC Command.

11. Enter the TECCV Command to verify proper setup.

12. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.

CWIL Card 1. Remove the car from service.

2. Turn OFF, Lock, and Tag out the mainline disconnect.

3. Note locations, then remove all wires and connectors from the old CN Card.

4. Take out the old CWIL Card.

5. Place the jumpers in same positions as on the old card.

6. Install the replacement CWIL Card.

7. Install all wires and connectors on the new card.

8. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

9. Enter the TECC Command to configure the CWIL

10. Enter the TECCV Command to verify the proper setup

11. Enter the DCN Command (to confirm communication and port assignments) for CWIL (e.g.
Node 0).

12. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 54 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

IMS Release Version V2R0
To Archive the Generic Software and the Job Image: Place a USB memory stick into the CPUA slot
of the car, and issue a ULDS command in the Car Remote FAST.
To Upload Software Updates to the ARM Devices: Place the software file (located on the USB stick)
in the update directory, and use the following Car Remote FAST commands:

UFWCNF CN file CN.VxRx

UFWCWF CWIL file CW.Vxx
UFWSLF SELB file SL.Vxx
USWHNBF HNB file HNB.VxRx
UFWHNF HN file HN.VxRx
UFWSPF Safety Processor file SPH.VxRx
UFWNPF NTSD Processor file NP.VxRx

IMS Applications All CAN node commands are issued through the Car Remote FAST in IMS. These commands give
the appropriate nodes their position and/or port assignments.
The CWIL node is fixed as node 0 and requires no jumpers to configure.The CN nodes are assigned
their ports and I/O assignments according to how the address jumpers are configured.
Note: Because CWIL is always node 0, never assign the CN to node 0.

The first port assigned to the CWIL node is the first port shown in the car I/O screen.
The DCN command displays the specific CWIL or CN data (node addresses and assigned ports)
from the job file.

Group I/O Screen HCIE - The first port, and the starting port for the next HN.
Notes:
• The port numbers increase sequentially from left to right.
• To display the HN number and assigned ports, use the DHNF or DHNR command.
• The controller must be in the Inspection Mode to use CAN programming commands.

1. Use the Car Remote FAST, and place the controller to be adjusted on Inspection Mode.

2. Enter DHNM to determine if the controller is the master or slave controller. See Figure 16 on
page 56.
Notes:
• If two controllers are sharing a riser, either may be assigned as master or slave. Only the
master controller of the riser executes a TECF or TECR command.
• Do not change the master or slave relationship from the factory settings. This action dis-
ables the proper functions of hall lanterns and other devices.
• Single car, new installations are defaulted to the master controller.
• Modernizations using CNA boards will always be defaulted to slave controllers with
unshared risers.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 55 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

IMS Applications
(continued) 3. To change the master controller designation, enter DHNM = 1.

Car 1 is sharing the HN

Cards with Car 2, and
Car 1 is the master.

Example:
Command to change
from master to slave
DHNM = 1,2

Car 2 is sharing the HN

Cards with Car 1, but
Car 2 functions as the
slave.

Example:
Command to change
from master to slave
DHNM = 0,1

Figure 16 - DHNM Car Remote FAST Screen

NEW FEATURE
Remote FAST Screen
IMS Version V2R0 Type an “H” (HELP) after any command entered, and the screen displays help for that command.
See Figure 17.
Note: This new feature works only with commands.

Figure 17 - Example of SCA Remote FAST Command with “H” (HELP)

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 56 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

IMS Applications
(continued) 4. Enter the TECF (front) or TECR (rear) Command as applicable. The Car Remote FAST
command instructs the CPUA to locate and teach the HN’s in a given riser. The HN is assigned
its logical floor number and the ports assigned to that location. See Figure 18.
Notes:
• If an HN is taught as HN 3, then physically moved to the fifth landing, the riser needs to be
taught and configured again.
• Ensure that the (end of the line) loading resistor is installed on the last HN Card, CON 3 Pin
2 to Pin 3. See Figure 19.

The TECF/R Command locates

HN Cards in a duct. HN Cards
are located from the top floor
down.

Figure 18 - TECF Remote FAST Screen

Figure 19 - HN Load Resistor

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 57 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

IMS Applications
(continued)
5. After a successful teach (TECF/R), use the Car Remote FAST and issue a TECCR and then a
TECC Command. See Figure 20.

TECCR resets or
clears the
configuration data.

TECC reissues the

configuration data

Figure 20 - TECCR and TECC Car Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 58 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

IMS Applications
(continued)
6. Use the Car Remote FAST to enter the DCN Command.
Note: The DCN Command displays all of the CAN channel 2 and 3 CWIL, CN, and CNA data
which helps to determine a logical node address, port assignments, shared ports, and if
the node is on-line and communicating. See Figure 21.

Title Description
On CN Card is communicating
RxTot Number of time-out errors
ID CN node address number
Ch Channel that the CN Card is assigned and connected to
SP Number of shared ports
TP Total number of ports
IMS Port Mapping Actual IMS ports assigned to this CN Card

Figure 21 - DCN Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 59 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

IMS Applications
(continued) CWIL is always node address = 0. Therefore, CN must start node address = 1 to avoid conflict.
CN nodes’ configuration is assigned by their address jumpers and the TECC command (which sets
the node configuration for all CWIL’s, CN and HN’s). See Figure 22.
7. To Change a Nodes-Specific Configuration Assignment:
a. DCN = (Node #) (Channel #) (Number of ports) (Port?) (Port?)
b. DCN = 1 2 4 0 1 2 3
c. Enter TECC
d. Verify operation
e. Enter WRT

8. To Change HN Nodes After They Have Been Taught.

a. DHNF (R)= (Node #) (Channel #) (Number of ports) (Port?) (Port?)
b. DCN = 1 2 4 0 1 2 3
c. Enter TECC
d. Verify operation
e. Enter WRT
Notes:
• To display the status of the HN nodes for either the front or rear, enter DHNF or DHNR. The
status includes communication data, floor numbers, and ports assigned.
• To initiate a search for unresponsive HN nodes, enter DHNS.

Title Description
HN HN node number
On HN Card is communicating
RxTot Number of time-out errors
Car Car number
Flr Floor number
Ports Actual assigned port no.
Ver Version of HN software
Rx0 Receiver overflow

Figure 22 - DHNF Car Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 60 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

IMS Applications
(continued)

DCNP (Node, Port) - Indicates whether this particular node and assigned port number is
communicating. The assigned I/O display in one’s and zero’s. See Figure 23.
• One = Input I/O
• Zero = Output or Unassigned I/O

1. To determine the status of a specific I/O at the node level, use the Ping Command.

2. To ping the MAINCOP node, enter the following command from the Car Remote FAST:
DCNP 0 0

Notes:
• The first zero represents the node number and the second zero represents the first
port on the node.
• All nodes begin with port zero as the first port at the node level.

CN
Address CN Software Version

Selected Port for Test

Enabled I/O’s

Figure 23 - DCNP Ping Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 61 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

IMS Applications
(continued)

DHNPF(R) - Indicates whether this particular node and assigned port number is communicating.
See Figure 24. See also DCNP.

• One = Input I/O

• Zero = Output or Unassigned I/O

1. To determine the status of an individual HN node, use the Ping Command.

2. To ping the HN1 node, enter the following command from the Car Remote FAST:
DCNPF 1 1 0

HN Address HN Software Version

Selected Port for Test

Enabled I/O’s

Figure 24 - DHNFP(R) Ping Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 62 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

On-Card
Diagnostics
IOD - LED Definitions

Desired
LED Color Definition
Status
NPBAD Red OFF ON if the NTSD processor has detected a fault.
NPGOOD Green ON ON if the NTSD processor is running with no faults.
SPBAD Red OFF ON if the Safety Processor has detected a fault.
SPGOOD Green ON ON if the Safety Processor is running with no faults.
PLDBAD Red OFF ON if the PLD has detected a fault.
PLDGOOD Green ON ON if the PLD is running with no faults.
AC Green ON ON if 120vac is present at CON18, relay EPEN is energized, and fuses F-EP and F-PS are good.
DOORS Green ~ ON if the Car and Hoistway doors are closed as seen by the FPGA (PLD).
P24 Green ON ON if 24vdc is present at CON20 and fuse F-P24 is good.
ON if 24vdc is present at CON20 and fuses F-P24GS and F-P24G are good (or if 24vdc is fed by
P24G Green ON
another powered-up car in the Group via CON21 cross-connections).
P24GS Green ON ON if 24vdc is present at CON20 and fuse F-P24GS is good.
DFS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the DOWN FAST valve solenoid.
DSS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the DOWN SLOW valve solenoid.
UFS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the UP FAST valve solenoid.
USS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the UP SLOW valve solenoid.
MCC1 Green ON ON if the system is trying to start the pump motor (contactor or electronic starting).
ON if the system is trying to start the pump motor (contactor starting) or provide power to the
MCC2 Green ~
starter (electronic starter).
ON if the CPUa is allowing a complete Safety String (SAFCPU output commanded ON). OFF when
SAFCPU Green ON
the CPUa has opened the Safety String (SAFCPU output commanded OFF).
ON if the Safety Processor is allowing a complete Safety String (SAFSP output commanded ON).
SAFSP Green ON
OFF when the Safety Processor has opened the Safety String (SAFSP output commanded OFF).
SAFE Green ON ON if 120vac from a complete Safety String is present at terminal 131 as seen by the CPUa.
ON if the NTSD Processor is allowing a high speed run (NTSNP output commanded ON). OFF
NTSNP Green ON when the NTSD Processor is forcing the FAST solenoids off when the Selector encounters a termi-
nal slowdown magnet (NTSNP output commanded OFF).
ON if the CPUa is allowing car movement in a terminal zone (TSRCPU output commanded ON).
OFF when the CPUa is forcing all valve solenoids off when the Selector encounters a terminal
TSRCPU Green ON
slowdown magnet and other terminal speed reduction efforts have failed to slow down the car
(NTSNP output commanded OFF).

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 63 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

IOD - Shunt Jumper Definitions/Settings

Name Purpose Position and Function
Selects Method for JTAG Altera 1-2: Program using Altera Download Cable
JP1
Programming (Factory Use Only) 2-3: Program using NP ARM processor (default)
1-2: Programming Mode (PLD will open Safety String)
JP2 Configure Safety Processor
2-3: Normal Operation (default)
1-2: Programming Mode (PLD will open Safety String)
JP3 Configure NTSD Processor
2-3: Normal Operation (default)

IOD - CONN Jumper Definitions/Settings

Name Purpose Position and Function
1-2 - Jumps out SAFSP
CON47 Jump out SAFSP and/or SAFCPU
2-3 - Jumps out SAFCPU
1-2 - Jumps out NTSNP
CON46 Jump out NTSNP and/or TSRCPU
2-3 - Jumps out TSRCPU
1-2 - Allows a complete Safety String to the Motor and
CON9A Temporary RUNBUG Operation
Valve when the RUNBUG has been removed from CON9.

IOD - Push Buttons and Switches

Name Type Function
RSTSP Pushbutton Reset Safety Processor (SP)
RSTNP Pushbutton Reset NTSD Processor (NP)
CLR_FLT Pushbutton Clear Latched PLD Faults
RUN Slide Run/Stop - Closes/Opens Safety String
HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS Slide Requests Hoistway Door Bypass ON or OFF
CAR DOOR BYPASS Slide Requests Car Door Bypass ON or OFF
DOOR DISCONNECT Slide Requests Door Disconnect ON or OFF
INCN Slide Requests Controller Inspection ON or OFF

UP Pushbutton Requests movement in the UP direction when INCN is ON

and ENABLE is pressed
ENABLE Pushbutton Enables UP/DOWN when INCN is ON
Requests movement in the DOWN direction when INCN is ON
DOWN Pushbutton
and ENABLE is pressed
IOD Fuses
Fuse Current Function
Rating
F-EP 0.5A Feeds 120vac to the EPEN relay coil.
F-PS 3.0A Feeds 120vac to the controller power supplies.
F-AC1A 6.0A Feeds 120vac to the car including door operators and car DC power supply.
F-AC1B 0.5A Feeds 120vac to the hoistway door interlock circuits.
F-AC1SC 3.0A Feeds 120vac to the Safety Circuit including Triac outputs.
F-P24 2.0A Feeds 24vdc lower voltage supplies and all 24V I/O in the controller.
F-P24G Variable Feeds 24vdc to the hall risers wired to this controller. Variable based on power
requirements of risers connected to this controller.
F-P24GS Variable Feeds 24vdc P24XC which cross-connects between controllers. Prevents a short on
P24XC from bringing down the controller. Variable based on power requirements of
all risers.
F-AC1 Variable Feeds 120vac from the T1 transformer X1 tap (CON16-1) to CON18-1 (source volt-
age for the EPEN relay and contacts to feed the system AC power (does not fuse
UPS output).
F-P24L 1.0A Feeds 24vdc to the CPUa card.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 64 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

IOD Connectors/Wiring

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 65 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

CPUA - LED Definitions

LED LED Name Color LED Flash Rate LED Function
STAT CPUA Status Red LED is OFF in Normal Mode.

LED flashes at 100ms rate contin-

uously if no Jobfile is loaded to
flash or a bad reload of data to
flash has occurred.
LED flashes at 100ms rate contin-
uously if no Jobfile is loaded to
flash or a bad reload of data to
flash has occurred.
WD Watchdog Green LED flashes at 300ms for 3 inter-
vals if upload successful then CPU
reboots and LED turns ON.

LED is ON if power is good, card is

LNK Ethernet Link Green ~ not in reset, FPGA is configured
and Watchdog has not timed out.
RX Ethernet Receive Green Varies depending on activity Ethernet Status - Link Good
TX Ethernet Transmit Green Varies depending on activity LED flashes while Ethernet Link is
receiving.
USBD USB Device Green Varies depending on activity LED flashes during activity on the
USB device port.
CHKSTOP ~ Green Varies depending on activity Factory use.
EGOOD ETSX Good Green Blinks on/off Not used by TAC32
EBAD ETSX Bad Red Blinks on/off Not used by TAC32

CPUA Shunt Jumper Definitions and Settings

Name Status Function

On Car CAN channel split capacitor enabled
CCC
Off Car CAN channel split capacitor disabled
On Car CAN channel loading resistors enabled
CCT
Off Car CAN channel loading resistors disabled
On Hoistway CAN channel split capacitor enabled
HC1C
Off Hoistway CAN channel split capacitor disabled
On Hoistway CAN channel loading resistors enabled
HC1T
Off Hoistway CAN channel loading resistors disabled
On Intra-Group CAN channel split capacitor enabled
RCC
Off Intra-Group CAN channel split capacitor disabled
On Intra-Group CAN channel loading resistors enabled
RCT
Off Intra-Group CAN channel loading resistors disabled
1-2 Boot High, Recover Operation
BOOT (JP1)
2-3 Boot Low, Normal Operation
1-2 Normal Operation
BOOTEN (JP1)
2-3 Factory Use

Note: If termination is required on any CAN channels, both the loading resistor and
split capacitor jumpers are to be ON for the termination to function properly.
If no termination is required, then both jumpers must be removed.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 66 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

CPUA - Connectors

Connector Name Function

1 IOD Interface Interface connector to IOD Card
4 CE MicroComm CE MicroComm RS485 com port
Standard RJ45 connector and MDI pin out, used for Inter-
5 Ethernet
Group communication
Standard USB Type A connector, used for loading soft-
6 USB Host
ware to the CPUA Card
7 UIT User Interface Tool connector
Standard USB Type B connector, used for connecting IMS
8 USB Device
via a PC’s USB port
Standard RS232 9 pin D-Shell for connecting IMS via a
11 RS232 D-Shell
PC’s serial port

CPUA Power Supply Tolerances CPUA Switch Functions

Supply Name Minimum Voltage Maximum Voltage Name Function

P5 4.85 Vdc 5.25 Vdc RST Resets the CPU on the CPUA Card
P3.3 3.20 Vdc 3.46 Vdc UDL Used to put the CPU in Upload Operation
P1.5 1.48 Vdc 1.57 Vdc RSTDSP Resets the ETSX DSP on the CPUA Card

CAN Selector LEDs

LED Color Desired Definition

Status
LED1 Red OFF?
LED2 Green ON?
LED3 Green ON?
LED4 Green ON?
LED5 Green ON?
STAT_UPA Green ON?
STAT_UPB Green ON?
P3.3 Green ON? ON if the 3.3vdc supply is operational (F1 fuse is good allowing
P24 to be regulated to 5.0vdc (P5) and 3.3vdc (P3.3).

CAN Selector Fuses

Fuse Current Rating Function

F1 1.0A Feeds P24 from the Selector CAT5 cable to the 5.0vdc (P5) and 3.3vdc (P3.3)
on-board power supplies.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 67 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

CN - LEDs
LED Description Color LED State (1=ON, 0=OFF) Condition Status

CAN Communication is
Start-up
Not Yet Established

STAT Status Green Software Running Properly

CAN Communication Error

Continuous ON 5V Supply is Operational

PWR Power Green Anytime
Continuous OFF Bad Fuse or Connection

CN Jumpers

Jumper Position Function Description Jumper Position Function Description

OFF Car Node #1 ON Enable
JP4 CAN Comm Shield
OFF Car Node #1 OFF Disable
OFF Car Node #1 JP5 ON Enable S/W Upload (Prov)
OFF Car Node #1 OFF Disable
JP1 Board Identification
ON Car Node #1 JP6 1-2 On Board Port Only
SPI Steering
ON Car Node #1 2-3 OFF Board (Expansion)
ON Car Node #1 2-3 OFF Board (Expansion) Only
ON Car Node #1 1-2 On Board Port Only
JP7 SPI Steering
OFF Car Node #1 2-3 OFF Board (Expansion)
OFF Car Node #1 1-3 OFF Board (Expansion) Only
ON Car Node #1 OFF On Board Port Only
ON Car Node #1 JP8 OFF OFF Board (Expansion) SPI Steering
JP2 Board Identification
OFF Car Node #1 1-2 OFF Board (Expansion) Only
OFF Car Node #1
ON Car Node #1
ON Car Node #1
OFF Car Node #1
ON Car Node #1
OFF Car Node #1
ON Car Node #1
JP3 Board Identification
OFF Car Node #1
ON Car Node #1
OFF Car Node #1
ON Car Node #1

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 68 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

HN LEDs

LED Description Color LED State Status

ON 5V Supply is Operational
P5 Power Green
OFF Bad Fuse or Connection

Software Running Properly

STAT Status Green CAN Communication Error

SPI Loop Error

HNB LEDs

LED Description Color LED State Status

ON 5V Supply is Operational
PWR Power Green
OFF Bad Fuse or Connection

Software Running Properly

STAT A Status Green CAN Communication Error

SPI Loop Error

Secondary
ON
Micro Running Properly
STAT B Status Green
Secondary
OFF
Micro Not Running

CWIL - Switches and Pushbuttons

Name Type Function

SW1 Pushbutton Tests Building Supply Power Fail Detection Circuit (Emergency Lighting).
SW2 Slide AC Power Switch, Removes 120VAC AND 24VDC from CWIL and Car.
Note: L10/L20 is not controlled by this switch and will still be present on CON 609 even when this
switch is in the OFF position).
RST Pushbutton Simultaneously resets Microprocessor and Microprocessor B.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 69 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

CWIL - LEDs

Name Color Definition

P24 Green ON: 24V is present at CON810
OFF: F_P24 fuse blown or 24V not present at CON810
P3 Green ON: 3.3vdc & 5vdc power supplies functioning properly
STATA Green Microprocessor A, see CN LED’s STAT
STATB Green Microprocessor B, see CN LED’s STAT

CWIL - Fuses

Current
Fuse Rating Function
F-AC1SB 0.5A Feeds AC1SF 120vac to COP stop switches and the car gate contact.
F-P24M 2.0A Feeds 24vdc to the on-board CN/Spare 24V connectors, battery charger circuit,
door operator, and selector.
F-P24L 0.5A Feeds 24vdc to the CWIL 5vdc on-board power supply.
F-P24A 3.0A Feeds 24vdc to external CN cards in the cab swing returns.
F-P24CF 4.0A Future Use (will provide P24 to the Front CDI).
F-P24CR 4.0A Future Use (will provide P24 to the Rear CDI).
F-BAT 3.0A Feeds 12vdc from the COP battery at CON 604 to the on-board emergency lighting
trigger, battery charging, and low voltage cutoff circuits.

CWIL - MTA Wire Loop Jumpers

3-Pin MTA Jumper Terminals Function Jumped

CON115 115-116 Safety Plank Switch
CON116 116-117 Emergency Exit Contact
CON117 117-117A Slack Rope/Tape Switch
CON117A 117A-118 Car Movement Lock Switch
CON118 118-118A Car Top Stop Switch - Front
CON118A 118A-118B Car Top Stop Switch - Rear
CON118B 118B-121 Fire Operation Panel Stop Switch
CON119 AC1SF-120 Front Main COP Stop Switch
CON120 120-120A Front Aux COP Stop Switch
CON120A 120A-120B Rear Main COP Stop Switch
CON120B 120B-CST Rear Aux COP Stop Switch

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 70 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

CAN Channel
Resistive Loading
Verification 1. Open the AC1 fuse holder to remove AC1 power on the controller to be checked.

2. Isolate the controller from the other controllers by disconnecting the following signals on the
controller being tested:
• HC1H, HC1L, SHHC1
• RCH, RCL, SHG
• P24XC
Note: Verify that these signals are reconnected upon completion of the CAN Channel Testing.

3. Confirm that no LED’s are illuminated on the IOD or CPUA modules.

4. Record what the Ohmmeter displays with leads shorted and not shorted. This action will help to
verify the accuracy of the test meter.

5. Use the Troubleshooting Guide on page 72 to confirm or correct the testing values.

Shortcuts To Identifying Problems

1. For a short in the hall riser cabling (the riser is series-connected): Go to the middle node and
unplug the cable. To check for a short, measure back to the controller and then measure
toward the end node.

2. For a short between the middle node and the end of the riser: Go to the node halfway between
the current position and the end of the link.
Notes:
• Repeat the above steps to identify a problem more quickly than checking the nodes in-
series.
• The measured termination resistance will change if the cable is disconnected.
• This test should result in a measurement of 120 Ohms instead of 60 Ohms.
• When all shorts are removed and termination is correct, then the measurement taken
should be 60 Ohms.
• There might be multiple shorts at multiple locations.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 71 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

CAN Channel
Resistive Loading
Verification
(continued)

Troubleshooting Guide
Car CAN Link (CCH/CCL), CONN 3 on the IOD
Indication Problem Verification
Resistance reads ~60 Ohms N/A N/A
Resistance does not read Termination jumpers and resistors Verify the correct jumper and resistor
~60 Ohms are set incorrectly settings on CPUA and all termination
points on the CC link
CCH to CCL
Note: See the CAN Shield and
Resistive Loading Procedures
Resistance is not a divisor Wires crossed, wrong value for Verify and correct
of 120 Ohms termination resistors, or shorts to
other circuits
Indication Problem Verification
Resistance reads Open N/A N/A
Circuit
CCH/CCL to Resistance = measurement A short between SHCC and CCH(L) Verify and correct
SHCC between CCH and CCL
Resistance is not the value Shorts to other circuits Verify and correct
measured between CCH and
CCL

Hall CAN Link (HC1H/HC1L), CONN 12 on the IOD

Indication Problem Verification
Resistance reads ~60 Ohms N/A N/A
Resistance does not read Termination jumpers and resistors Verify the correct jumper and resistor
~60 Ohms are set incorrectly settings on CPUA and all termination
points on the HC1 Link
HC1H to HC1L
Note: See the CAN Shield and
Resistive Loading Procedures
Resistance is not a divisor Wires crossed, wrong value for Verify and correct
of 120 Ohms termination resistors, or shorts to
other circuits
Indication Problem Verification
Resistance reads Open N/A N/A
Circuit
HC1H or HC1L Resistance = measurement A short between SHHC1 and HC1H Verify and correct
to SHHC1 between HC1H and HC1L or HC1L
Resistance is not the value Shorts to other circuits Verify and correct
measured between HC1H
and HC1L

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 72 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

Adjust an Offline
CAN Node 1. If the offline CAN node is a CWIL, CN, or CNA board, issue the DCN command from the CAR
Remote FAST.

2. Confirm that the node is in node-communication with the CPUA board.

3. Visually inspect the node; confirm that the node has power and is ON.

4. If the node is not powered-up, check and replace fuses on the board or at the controller (as
necessary).

5. Check and confirm the logical node addressing jumpers as indicated by the DCN command.
Ensure that each node has an individual address.

6. If the addressing jumpers are correct, confirm all wiring associated with the assigned CAN
Channel (as indicated by the DCN command).

7. If the offline node is an HN or HNB, issue the DHNF(R) command from the CAR Remote FAST.
Note: The DHNF(R) command will indicate which node is offline. This command also provides
other information (check for open fuses, etc.).

8. Confirm that the HN is powered-up. If not, check the fuses on the HN, and make sure that the
P24G fuse is good at the controller.

9. If the fuses are good, and the HN is powered-up, check all of the wiring associated with CAN
Channel 3.

10. Should the node still be offline, replace the node.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 73 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

DHNF/ DHNR
Command The DHNF or DHNR Command displays the HN and HNB boards assigned to a front (DHNF)
or rear (DHNR) riser, the status of the HN, and its logical floor assignment and porting. See
Figure 25 on page 75.

Verify the DHNF / DHNR Command

1. Ensure that the HN is powered-up.

2. Confirm that the connection for the HN's CAN channel is correct.

3. Verify that the JP9 on the HN is in the 1-2 position.

4. Ensure that the HN is able to teach. If not, check the following:

a. The proper power for all of the HN’s in the riser.
b. The correct CAN connection for all of the HN’s in the riser.
c. The correct position of JP9 on all HN’s in the riser.
d. The correct Teach Line connection to every HN in the riser.
e. The proper termination for the riser as well as the entire HN Network.
f. Compare the physical number of HN’s in the riser to the number of HN’s in the
DHNF/DHNR command.

RxO, BOff, TxEr, RxEr

RxTot cannot be cleared. The CAN error counters (RxO, BOff, TxEr, RxEr) are cleared every
time a DHNF/DHNR command is issued.
Note: If RxO, BOff, TxEr, RxEr fields are ever non-zero, and remain non-zero, verify the
following:
• Proper termination of the CAN bus.
• Appropriate voltage of the HN's.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 74 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

DHNF/ DHNR
Command
(continued)

HN: HN Number
1 = Node is online
On:
0 = Node is offline
RxTot: Total number of messages received from the HN
Car: Car number for this command
Flr: Floor where the HN is located
Ports: Port mapping of the HN
Ver: Version of the HN software
Type: Version of the microprocessor
Rx0: Number of Rx buffer overflow interrupts on the HN CAN controller
BOff: Number of Bus Off interrupts on the HN CAN controller
TxEr: Number of Tx Errors currently in the HN CAN controller
RxEr: Number of Rx Errors currently in the HN CAN controller

Figure 25 - IMS Output from the DHNF/R Command

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 75 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

DCN Command The DCN Command displays the Car CN nodes and the associated error conditions with each node.
See Figure 26.

If On = 0, the node is offline - check the following:

1. The CN power.
2. The connection of the CN's CAN channel.
3. The correct position, 1-2, of the JP14 (on the CN).
4. Proper CAN termination for the CN network.
5. Correct configuration of the jumpers JP4-8 (on the CN).

CN CN Node ID Ch CAN Channel of CN

Name CN Node Label Ver CN software version
1 = Node is online Type CN microprocessor version
ON
0 = Node is offline SP Number of shared ports
RxTot Total number of messages TP Total number of ports
received from the CN. CN card physical ports as related
Note: RxTot cannot be cleared to IMS I/O window ports
CN Ports
(Lobby panels only) (in example above, 255 = number
ID CN node address per CN jumpers of unused ports)
JP4-JP7

Figure 26 - DCN Command in Car Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 76 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

CNN Command The CNN Command displays the three CAN links and the associated error conditions with
each link. See Figure 27.

If RxBufO, TxBufO, BusOf, BusEr, ErWarn, and/or DatOvr are non-zero, and remain non-zero, verify
the following:

• Proper termination of the CAN bus.

• Appropriate voltage of the nodes.

Figure 27 - CNN Command in Car Remote FAST Screen

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 77 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

Transformer
Configuration Data
Primary Secondary
Print No.
Voltage Connections Configuration Voltage Connections Configuration
874DA1 208 H1 and H2 None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
240 H1 and H4 H1−H3, H2−H4
874DA2 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
480 H1 and H4 H2−H3
874DA3* 240 H1 and H4 H1−H3, H2−H4 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
380 H1 and H2
874DA4* 400 H1 and H3 None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
416 H1 and H4
874DA5 600 H1 and H2 None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
200 H1 and H2
874DA6** None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
220 H1 and H3
874DB1 208 H1 and H2 None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
240 H1 and H4 H1−H3, H2−H4
874DB2 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
480 H1 and H4 H2−H3
874DB3 600 H1 and H2 None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
200 H1 and H2
874DC1* None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
220 H1 and H3
380 H1 and H2
874DC3* 400 H1 and H3 None 120 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
415 H1 and H4
208 H1 and H2
874DJ1* H2 and H3 None 120/240 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
575 H1 and H4
380 H1 and H2
874DJ2* 400 H3 and H4 None 120/240 X1−X4 X1−X3, X2−X4
415 H1 and H4
240
H1−H3, H2−H4 X1−X3, X2−X4
874DJ4* 400 H1 and H4 120/240 X1−X4
H2−H3 X−2−X3
480
230 H1 and H4 H1−H3, H2−H4
874DK1 120 X1−X2 None
460 H1 and H4 H2−H3
230 H1 and H4 H1−H3, H2−H4
874DL1 120 X1−X2 None
460 H1 and H4 H2−H3
874DL2* 208 H1 and H2 None 120 X1−X3 None
874DL3* 575 H1 and H4 None 120 X1−X3 None
*Used for 50 Hz AND 60 Hz applications.
**Used ONLY for 50 Hz applications.

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 78 Printed in USA May, 2010

Service Information APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST

Motor Data for

Siemens Electronic
Starter
(1 of 2)

Line or
Overload Overload
Motor Nameplate Phase
Motor HP Current Current
Voltage Amps Wiring
Setting Range
Config.
200V/208V 17.5 LINE 17.5 13−27
220V 15.9 LINE 15.9 13−27
230V 15.2 LINE 15.2 13−27
5 380V 9.2 LINE 9.2 9−18
415V 8.4 LINE 8.4 9−18
460V 7.6 LINE 7.6 9−18
575V 6.1 LINE 6.1 5−10
200V/208V 25 LINE 25 20−40
220V 23 LINE 23 20−40
230V 22 LINE 22 20−40
7.5 380V 13 LINE 13 13−27
415V 12 LINE 12 9−18
460V 11 LINE 11 9−18
575V 9 LINE 9 9−18
200V/208V 32 LINE 32 30−60
220V 29 LINE 29 22−45
230V 28 LINE 28 22−45
10 380V 17 LINE 17 13−27
415V 15 LINE 15 13−27
460V 14 LINE 14 13−27
575V 11 LINE 11 9−18
200V/208V 48 LINE 48 45−90
220V 44 LINE 44 45−90
230V 42 LINE 42 45−90
15 380V 25 LINE 25 20−40
415V 23 LINE 23 20−40
460V 21 LINE 21 20−40
575V 17 LINE 17 13−27
200V/208V 62 LINE 62 45−90
220V 56 LINE 56 45−90
230V 54 LINE 54 45−90
20 380V 33 LINE 33 30−60
415V 30 LINE 30 22−45
460V 27 LINE 27 20−40
575V 22 LINE 22 20−40
200V/208V 78 LINE 78 67−135
220V 71 LINE 71 67−135
230V 68 LINE 68 67−135
25 380V 41 LINE 41 30−60
415V 37 LINE 37 30−60
460V 34 LINE 34 30−60
575V 27 LINE 27 20−40

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 79 Printed in USA May, 2010

APPENDIX A - IMS SMARTFAST Service Information

Motor Data for

Siemens Electronic
Starter
(2 of 2)

Line or
Overload Overload
Motor Nameplate Phase
Motor HP Current Current
Voltage Amps Wiring
Setting Range
Config.
200V/208V 92 LINE 92 67−135
220V 84 LINE 84 67−135
230V 80 LINE 80 67−135
30 380V 48 LINE 48 45−90
415V 44 LINE 44 45−90
460V 40 LINE 40 30−60
575V 32 LINE 32 30−60
200V/208V 120 PHASE 120 67−135
220V 109 PHASE 109 45−90
230V 104 PHASE 104 45−90
40 380V 63 LINE 63 67−135
415V 57 LINE 57 45−90
460V 52 LINE 52 45−90
575V 41 LINE 41 30−60
200V/208V 150 PHASE 150 67−135
220V 136 PHASE 136 67−135
230V 130 PHASE 130 67−135
50 380V 79 LINE 79 67−135
415V 72 LINE 72 67−135
460V 65 LINE 65 67−135
575V 52 LINE 52 45−90
200V/208V 177 PHASE 177 90−180
220V 161 PHASE 161 67−135
230V 154 PHASE 154 67−135
60 380V 93 LINE 93 67−135
415V 85 LINE 85 67−135
460V 77 LINE 77 67−135
575V 62 LINE 62 45−90
200V/208V 221 PHASE 221 90−180
220V 201 PHASE 201 90−180
230V 192 PHASE 192 90−180
75 380V 116 PHASE 116 67−135
415V 106 PHASE 106 45−90
460V 96 PHASE 96 45−90
575V 77 LINE 77 67−135

© 2010 ThyssenKrupp Elevator 5 - 80 Printed in USA May, 2010